MiCOM P139 - Schneider Electricms.schneider-electric.be/OP_MAIN/Micom/P139_EN_M_A88_Vol2.pdf · MiCOM P139 Feeder Management and Bay Control ... E 4.12 Selection Table K11 E-369

MiCOM P139 Feeder Management

and Bay Control Version: -304/306/307 -

405/406/407/408/409/410/411/412/413 -605/611/612

Technical Manual Volume 2 of 2

P139/EN M/A88

Contains:V605 P139/EN M/B33 (AFSV.12.09450.D) V611 P139/EN AD/A77 (AFSV.12.09690.D)V612 P139/EN AD/A88 (AFSV.12.09950 D)

MiCOM P139 Feeder Management

and Bay Control

Version 304 405/406/407 -605

Technical Manual Volume 2 of 2

P139/EN M/B33 (AFSV.12.09450 D)

!

Warning When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.

Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors are used, wire end ferrules must be employed.

Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing.

For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.

Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If any other modification is made without the express permission of AREVA T&D, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the product unsafe.

Qualified Personnel are individuals who

! are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being connected;

! are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;

! are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards;

! are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

Note The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information.

Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of AREVA, including settlement of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the operating manual.

Appendix

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 AP-1

A Glossary

B List of Signals

C List of Bay Types

D Terminal Connection Diagrams

E Address Lists (Available as a PDF file only. Not included in the printed manual.)

F Upgrade Documentation

Appendix (continued)

AP-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

A Glossary A-1A 1 Function Groups A-1A 2 Modules A-2A 3 Symbols A-3A 4 Examples of Signal Names A-10A 5 Symbols Used A-11

B List of Signals B-1B 1 Internal Signal Names B-1B 2 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or

IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard) B-6

B 2.1 Interoperability B-6B 2.1.1 Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters) B-6B 2.1.2 Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) B-7B 2.1.3 Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters) B-8B 2.1.4 Application Layer B-9B 2.1.5 Basic Application Functions B-15

B 3 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 B-18B 3.1 Interoperability B-18B 3.1.1 Physical Layer B-18B 3.1.1.1 Electrical Interface B-18B 3.1.1.2 Optical Interface B-18B 3.1.1.3 Transmission Rate B-18B 3.1.2 Link Layer B-19B 3.1.3 Application Layer B-19B 3.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data B-19B 3.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU B-19B 3.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor

Direction B-19

B 3.1.3.3.1 System Functions in Monitor Direction B-19B 3.1.3.3.2 Status Indications in Monitor Direction B-20B 3.1.3.3.3 Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor

Direction B-21

B 3.1.3.3.4 Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction B-22B 3.1.3.3.5 Fault Indications in Monitor Direction B-23B 3.1.3.3.6 Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction B-25B 3.1.3.3.7 Measurands in Monitor Direction B-25B 3.1.3.3.8 Generic Functions in Monitor Direction B-26B 3.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control

Direction B-27

B 3.1.3.4.1 System Functions in Control Direction B-27B 3.1.3.4.2 General Commands in Control Direction B-27B 3.1.3.4.3 Generic Functions in Control Direction B-28B 3.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions B-29B 3.1.3.6 Miscellaneous B-29


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 AP-3

C List of Bay Types C-1

D 1 Terminal Connection Diagrams D-1 D 1.1 D 1.2 D 1.3 D 1.4

Case 40 T Case 84 T NCIT Module Connection RTD Module for PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120

D-1 D-13 D-19 D-20

E Address List E-1

E 1 Parameters E-3 E 1.1 Device Identification E-3 E 1.2 Configuration Parameters E-14 E 1.3 Function Parameters E-94 E 1.3.1 Global E-94 E 1.3.2 General Functions E-102 E 1.3.3 Parameter Subsets E-182 E 1.3.4 Control E-202

E 2 Operation E-226 E 2.1 Cyclic Values E-226 E 2.1.1 Measured Operating Data E-226 E 2.1.2 Physical State Signals E-236 E 2.1.3 Logic State Signals E-261 E 2.2 Control and Testing E-330 E 2.3 Operating Data Recording E-335

E 3 Events E-336 E 3.1 Event Counters E-336 E 3.2 Measured Fault Data E-339 E 3.3 Fault Data Acquisition E-343

E 4 Selection Tables E-345 E 4.1 Selection Table 'Binary Outputs und LEDs' E-345 E 4.2 Selection Table 'Binary Inputs' E-355 E 4.3 Selection Table K1 E-358 E 4.4 Selection Table K2 E-359 E 4.5 Selection Table K4 E-361 E 4.6 Selection Table K5 E-362 E 4.7 Selection Table K6 E-364 E 4.8 Selection Table K7 E-366 E 4.9 Selection Table K8 E-367 E 4.10 Selection Table K9 E-368 E 4.11 Selection Table K10 E-368 E 4.12 Selection Table K11 E-369 E 4.13 Selection Table K13 E-370 E 4.14 Selection Table K15 E-370 E 4.15 Selection Table K16 E-371 E 4.16 Selection Table K17 E-374 E 4.17 Selection Table K18 E-374 E 4.18 Selection Table K19 E-375 E 4.19 Selection Table K20 E-376 E 4.20 Selection Table K22 E-377 E 4.21 Selection Table K23 E-379 E 4.22 Selection Table K24 E-379 E 4.23 Selection Table K25 E-379 E 4.24 Selection Table K30 E-379


AP-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

E 4.25 Selection Table K99 E-380 E 4.26 Selection Table K101 E-388 E 4.27 Selection Table K102 E-393 E 4.28 Selection Table K103 E-409 E 4.29 Selection Table K104 E-413 E 4.30 Selection Table F 497 E-442 E 4.31 Selection Table F 571 E-443 E 4.32 Selection Table F 670 E-443 E 4.33 Selection Table F 729 E-444 E 4.34 Selection Table F 730 E-444 E 4.35 Selection Table F 738 E-445

E 4.36 Selection Table F 756 E-446 E 4.37 Selection Table F 798 E-447

E 5 Possible Entries into Memory E-449 E 5.1 Fault Memory E-449 E 5.2 Ground Fault Memory E-456 E 5.3 Overload Memory E-458 E 5.4 Operating Data Memory E-461 E 5.5 Monitoring Signal Memory E-467

F Upgrade Documentation F-1

Appendix A - Glossary

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 A-1

A 1 Function Groups

ARC: Auto-reclosing control ASC: Automatic synchronism check CBF: Circuit breaker failure protection CMD_1: Signale pole commands COMM1: Logic Communication Interface 1 COMM2: Logic Communication Interface 2 COMM3: Logic Communication Interface 3 COUNT: Binary counts DEV01: to DEV10:

Device 01 to Device 10

DTOC: Definite-time overcurrent protection DVICE: Device FT_DA: Fault data acquisition FT_RC: Fault recording f<>: Frequency protection GF_DA: Ground fault data acquisition GF_RC: Ground fault recording GFDSS: Ground fault direction determination using steady-state values I2>: Unbalance protection IDMT: Inverse-time overcurrent protection ILOCK: Interlocking logic INP: Binary input IRIGB: IRIG-B clock synchronisation LED: LED indicators LIMIT: Limit monitoring LOC: Local control panel LOGIC: Logic MAIN: Main function MCMON: Measuring-circuit monitoring MEASI: Measured data input MEASO: Measured data output MP: Motor protection MT_RC: Monitoring signal recording OL_DA: Overload data acquisition OL_RC: Overload recording OP_RC: Operating data recording OUTP: Binary and analog output P<>: Power directional protection PC: PC link PSIG: Protective signaling PSS: Parameter subset selection SCDD: Short-circuit direction determination SFMON: Self-monitoring SIG_1: Signale pole signals SOTF: Switch on to fault protection TGFD: Transient ground fault direction determination THERM: Thermal overload protection V<>: Time-voltage protection

Appendix A - Glossary (continued)

A-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

A 2 Modules A: Communication module B: Bus module L: Local control module P: Processor module T: Transformer module V: Power supply module X: Binary I/O module Y: Analog I/O module


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 A-3

A 3 Symbols

Graphic symbols for block diagrams Binary elements according to DIN 40900 Part 12, September 1992, IEC 617-12: amended 1991 Analog information processing according to DIN 40900 Part 13, January 1981 To document the linking of analog and binary signals, additional symbols have been used, taken from several DIN documents. As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom. Other flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left side of the signal flow, output signals on the right side.

Symbol Description

=

To obtain more space for representing a group of related elements, contours of the elements may be joined or cascaded if the following rules are met: There is no functional linkage between elements whose common contour line is oriented in the signal flow direction. Note: This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations with two or more signal flow directions, such as for symbols with a control block and an output block. There exists at least one logical link between elements whose common contour line runs perpendicularly to the signal flow direction.

Components of a symbol A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination and one or more qualifiers.


A-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Symbol Description

Control block A control block contains an input function common to several symbols. It is used for the collective setting of several trigger elements, for example.

Output block An output block contains an output function common to several symbols.

Settable control block The four digits represent the address under which the function shown in the text after the colon may be set via the local control panel.

Settable control block with function blocks The digits in the function block show the settings that are possible at this address. The text below the symbol shows the setting and the corresponding unit or meaning.


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 A-5

Symbol Description

Static input Only the state of the binary input variable is effective.

Dynamic input Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 is effective.

Negation of an output The value up to the border line is negated at the output.

Negation of an input The input value is negated before the border line.

Dynamic input with negation Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 is effective.

AND element The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables are 1.

OR element The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input variable is 1.

Threshold element The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input variables are 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number.

(m out of n) element The output variable will be 1 only if just one input variable is 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number if the number of inputs is increased or decreased accordingly.


A-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Symbol Description

Delay element The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs after a time delay of t1 relative to the corresponding transition at the input. The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs after a time delay of t2 relative to the corresponding transition at the input. t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values (in seconds or strobe ticks).

Monostable flip-flop The output variable will be 1 only if the input variable changes to 1. The output variable will remain 1 for 100 ms, independent of the duration of the input value 1 (non-retriggerable). Without a 1 in the function block the monostable flip-flop is retriggerable. The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be changed to any other duration.

Analog-digital converter An analog input signal is converted to a binary signal.

Subtractor The output variable is the difference between the two input variables. A summing element is obtained by changing the minus sign to a plus sign at the symbol input.

Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal exceeds a specific threshold. The output variable remains 1 until the input signal drops below the threshold again.

Memory, general Storage of a binary or analog signal.


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 A-7

Symbol Description

Non-stable flip-flop When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse sequence is generated at the output. The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse sequence starts with the input variable transition (synchronized start). If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse sequence ends with the ending of the 1 signal at the input (synchronized stop).

Amplifier The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is also 1.

Band pass filter The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of the input signals. All other frequencies (above and below 50 Hz) are attenuated.

Counter At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to 1 are counted and stored in the function block. At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable from 0 to 1 resets the counter to 0.

Electromechanical drive in general, here a relay, for example.

Signal level converter with electrical isolation between input and output. L+ = pos. voltage input L- = neg. voltage input U1 = device identifier


A-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Symbol Description

Input transformer with phase and item identifiers (according to DIN EN 60445) Phase identifiers for current inputs: for A: A1 and A2 for B: B1 and B2 for C: C1 and C2 for N: N1 and N2 Phase identifiers for voltage inputs via transformer 1: for A: 1U for B: 1V for C: 1W for N: 1N via transformer 2: for A: 2U for B: 2V Item identifiers for current transformers: for A: T1 for B: T2 for C: T3 for N: T4 for voltage transformer 1: for A: T5 for B: T6 for C: T7 for N: T8 for VG-N transformer: T90 for voltage transformer 2: for A: T15

Change-over contact with item identifier

Special symbol Output relay in normally-energized arrangement (closed-circuit operation).


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 A-9

Symbol Description

PC interface with pin connections

Multiplier The output variable is the result of the multiplication of the two input variables.

Divider The output variable is the result of the division of the two input variables.

Comparator The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) are equal to the function in the function block.

Formula block The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) satisfy the equation in the function block


A-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

A 4 Examples of Signal Names

All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of Chapter 3 as follows:

Signal Name Description

! FT_RC: Fault recording n 305 100

Internal signal names are not coded by a data model address. In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond. The small figure underneath the signal name represents a code that is irrelevant to the user. The internal signal names used and their origins are listed in Appendix B.

DIST: VNG>> triggered [ 036 015 ]

Signal names coded by a data model address are represented by their address (shown in square brackets). Their origin is given in Chapters 7 and 8.

MAIN: General reset [ 003 002 ] !1: Execute

A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its signal name, address, and the setting preceded by the setting arrow.


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 A-11

A 5 Symbols Used

Symbol Meaning

t Time duration

V Voltage, potential difference

V Complex voltage

I Electrical current

I Complex current

Z Complex impedance

Z Modulus of complex impedance

f Frequency

δ Temperature in °C

Σ Sum, result

Ω Unit of electrical resistance

α Angle

ϕ Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a defined current and a defined voltage.

τ Time constant

∆T Temperature difference in K

A-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Appendix B - List of Signals

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-1

B 1 Internal Signal Names

Internal signal names are not coded by an external address. In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond.

Internal Signal Names Figure

IDMT: Starting A 3-129

IDMT: Starting B 3-129

IDMT: Starting C 3-129

IDMT: IN 3-132

ARC: Starting GFDSS 3-159

ARC: Close request 3-164

ARC: HSR not permitted 3-164

ARC: TDR not permitted 3-164

ARC: Block/reset HSR 3-162

ARC: Block/reset TDR 3-162

ARC: HSR trip t. elapsed 3-156, 3-158, 3-159, 3-160, 3-161

ARC: TDR trip t. elapsed 3-157, 3-158, 3-159, 3-160, 3-161

DEV01: Open request 3-273

DEV01: End open command 3-278

DEV01: Open cmd. rejection 3-274

DEV01: Close request 3-273

DEV01: End close command 3-278

DEV01: Close cmd. rejection 3-274

DEV01: Enable BI Open 3-275

DEV01: Enable BI Close 3-275

DEV01: Enable SI Open 3-274

DEV01: Enable SI Close 3-274

DEV01: Switch. device runn. 3-278

DEV01: Protection trip cmd. 3-276

DEV01: Protect. close cmd. 3-276

DEV01: Start runn.time mon. 3-281

DEV01: Latching time elaps. 3-273

DEV01: Latching time runn. 3-273

Appendix B - List of Signals (continued)

B-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Internal Signal Names Figure GFDSS: Op. delay IN elapsed 3-188

GFDSS: Oper.delay Y(N)> elaps 3-194

GFDSS: IN filtered 3-188

GFDSS: IN> triggered 3-188

GFDSS: P 3-184, 3-190

GFDSS: Q 3-184, 3-190

GFDSS: Direction LS 3-184, 3-190

GFDSS: Direction BS 3-184, 3-190

GFDSS: VNG 3-183

GFDSS: VNG filtered 3-184, 3-190

GFDSS: VNG> triggered 3-184

TGFD: Hardware fault 3-196

TGFD: IN,p> triggered 3-198

TGFD: Reset signal 3-200

TGFD: Direction LS 3-198

TGFD: Direction BS 3-198

TGFD: VNG 3-197

TGFD: VNG> triggered 3-198

TGFD: VNG> (f0) triggered 3-198

f<>: No. periods reached 3-232

f<>: fMeas 3-232

f<>: VMeas 3-231

MAIN: Start. I>,kIref,P> 3-72

MAIN: Starting Ineg 3-71

MAIN: Starting A int. 3-71

MAIN: Starting B int. 3-71

MAIN: Starting C int. 3-71

MAIN: Starting N int. 3-71

MAIN: Customized bay type 3-45

MAIN: Sel. meas. loop A-G 3-107

MAIN: Sel. meas. loop A-B 3-107

MAIN: Sel. meas. loop B-G 3-107

MAIN: Sel. meas. loop B-C 3-107

MAIN: Sel. meas. loop C-G 3-107

MAIN: Sel. meas. loop C-A 3-107


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-3


MAIN: Sel. meas. loop PG 3-107

MAIN: Sel. meas. loop PP 3-107

MAIN: End command 3-281

MAIN: Block. 1 sel.functions 3-64

MAIN: Block. 2 sel.functions 3-64

MAIN: Block tim.st. IN,neg 3-71

MAIN: Direct motor control 3-45

MAIN: General starting int. 3-72

MAIN: meas 3-107

MAIN: Reset LED 3-83

MAIN: Inrush stabil. trigg 3-62

MAIN: Protection active 3-59

MAIN: Block start. signal 3-71

MAIN: Vmeas 3-107

MAIN: Time tag 3-82

COMM1: Selected protocol 3-10

COMM1: Debounced signal 3-42

COMM1: Communication error 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14, 3-15, 3-16

SCDD: Resid. curr.stage bl. 3-142

SCDD: Determin. N enabled 3-142

SCDD: Determin. P enabled 3-138

SCDD: Phase curr.stage bl. 3-138

SCDD: Block. direct. tI> 3-140

SCDD: Block. direct. tI>> 3-140

SCDD: Block. direct. tIN> 3-144

SCDD: Block. direct. tIN>> 3-144

SCDD: Block. direct. tkIref> 3-140

SCDD: Block. direct. tkINref> 3-144

MEASO: Enable 3-35

MEASO: Reset meas.val.outp. 3-36

MP: St. kP*Iref>/Istup> 3-204

MP: IStUp> 3-209

MP: IP,max r.m.s./Iref 3-204

MP: Block. replica THERM 3-209

MP: Machine stopped 3-209


B-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33


P<>: P 3-236

P<>: P- 3-236

P<>: P+ 3-236

P<>: Q 3-236

P<>: Q- 3-236

P<>: Q+ 3-236

ASC: active 3-172

ASC: Sel. meas. loop PG 3-170

ASC: Close enable DEV01 AC 3-179

ASC: Clos.enable w. block 3-172

ASC: Clos.rej. w. block 3-172

ASC: gen. close request 3-173

ARC: man. close request 3-173

ARC: AC active for DEV01 3-179

ARC: Test 3-173

ARC: VMeas 3-170

FT_DA: Output fault locat. 3-105

FT_DA: Output meas. values 3-105

FT_DA: kG 3-106

FT_DA: A-kG 3-106

FT_DA: IB-kG 3-106

FT_DA: IC-kG 3-106

THERM: Block. by CTA error 3-215, 3-216

THERM: I 3-217

THERM: With CTA 3-215, 3-216

V<>: Vneg 3-225

V<>: Vpos 3-225

V<>: VNG 3-228

DTOC: Starting A 3-114

DTOC: Starting B 3-114

DTOC: Starting C 3-114

DTOC: Starting N 3-119

DTOC: IN> 3-118

DTOC: Pulse prol. runn. 3-121

DTOC: t2 N 3-121


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-5


LOC: Remote & Local 3-8

LOC: Return time select act. 3-2

SOTF: ARC block. by close cm 3-146


B-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

B 2 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)

This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a general definition of the telecontrol interface for substation control systems.

B 2.1 Interoperability

This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets and other options from which subsets are to be selected in order to implement specific telecontrol systems. Certain parameters such as the number of bytes (octets) in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This means that only one value of the defined parameter is allowed per system. Other parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of subsets that are suitable for the given application. This section combines the parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system components supplied by different manufacturers, then it is necessary for all partners to agree on the selected parameters.

The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked. 1Note: The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain parameters for specific parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling factors for individually addressable measured values.

B 2.1.1 Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters)

x Point-to-point configuration x Multipoint-party line configuration

x Multiple point-to-point configuration Multipoint-star configuration

1 See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-7

B 2.1.2 Physical Layer 2 (Network-Specific Parameters)

Transmission Rate (Control Direction) 3

Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28

Standardized


Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s

Balanced interface X.24/X.27

100 bit/s x 2,400 bit/s 2,400 bit/s 56,000 bit/s

200 bit/s x 4,800 bit/s 4,800 bit/s 64,000 bit/s

300 bit/s x 9,600 bit/s 9,600 bit/s x 600 bit/s 19,200 bit/s

x 1,200 bit/s 38,400 bit/s

Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction) 2


Standardized


Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s

Balanced interface X.24/X.27

100 bit/s x 2,400 bit/s 2,400 bit/s 56,000 bit/s 200 bit/s x 4,800 bit/s 4,800 bit/s 64,000 bit/s 300 bit/s x 9,600 bit/s 9,600 bit/s x 600 bit/s 19,200 bit/s x 1,200 bit/s 38 400 bit/s

2 See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. 3 The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be identical.


B-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

B 2.1.3 Link Layer 4(Network-Specific Parameters)

Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used exclusively in this companion standard.

Link Transmission Procedure Address Field of the Link x Balanced transmission x Not present

(balanced transmission only) x Unbalanced transmission x One octet x Two octets 5 Frame Length x Structured 240 Maximum length L (number of octets) x Unstructured

4 See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101. 5 Balanced only.


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-9

B 2.1.4 Application Layer6

Transmission mode for application data

Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion standard.

Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter)

x One octet x Two octets 1

Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter)

x One octet x Structured x Two octets x Unstructured x Three octets

Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter)

x One octet x Two octets (with originator address)



B-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Selection of Standard ASDUs

Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

x <1> = Single-point information M_SP_NA_1

x <2> = Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1

x <3> = Double-point information M_DP_NA_1

x <4> = Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1

x <5> = Step position information M_ST_NA_1

x <6> = Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1

x <7> = Bit string of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1

x <8> = Bit string of 32 bit with time tag M_BO_TA_1

x <9> = Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1

x <10> = Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TA_1

x <11> = Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1

x <12> = Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_TB_1

<13> = Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1

<14> = Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1

x <15> = Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1

x <16> = Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1

x <17> = Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1

x <18> = Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag ME_EP_TB_1

x <19> = Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TC_1


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-11

<20> = Packed single-point information with status change detection M_PS_NA_1

<21> = Measured value, normalized value without quality descriptor M_ME_ND_1


B-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Process Information in Monitor Direction 7 (Station-Specific Parameter)

x <45> = Single command C_SC_NA_1 x <46> = Double command C_DC_NA_1 x <47> = Regulating step command C_IT_NA_1 <48> = Set point command, normalized value C_RC_NA_1 <49> = Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1 <50> = Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1 <51> = Bit string of 32 bit C_BO_NA_1

System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

x <70> = End of initialization ME_EI_NA_1

7 Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-13

System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

x <100> = Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1 x <101> = Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1 x <102> = Read command C_RD_NA_1 x <103> = Clock synchronization command 8 C_CS_NA_1 x <104> = Test command C_TS_NB_1 <105> = Reset process command C_RP_NC_1 <106> = Delay acquisition command 9 C_CD_NA_1

8 The command procedure is formally processed, but there is no change in the local time in the station. 9 See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.


B-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

x <110> = Parameter of measured value, normalized value P_ME_NA_1

x <111> = Parameter of measured value, scaled value P_ME_NB_1 <112> = Parameter of measured value, short floating point value P_ME_NC_1 <113> = Parameter activation P_AC_NA_1

File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)

<120> = File ready F_FR_NA_1 <121> = Section ready F_SR_NA_1 <122> = Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1 <123> = Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1 <124> = Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1 <125> = Segment F_SG_NA_1 <126> = Directory F_DR_TA_1


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-15

B 2.1.5 Basic Application Functions10

Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter)

x Remote initialization

General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter)

x Global

x Group 1 x Group 7 x Group 13 x Group 2 x Group 8 x Group 14 x Group 3 x Group 9 x Group 15 x Group 4 x Group 10 x Group 16 x Group 5 x Group 11 x Group 6 x Group 12 Addresses per group have to be defined.

Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter)

x Clock synchronization



B-16 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter)

x Direct command transmission Select and execute command Direct set point command transmission Select and execute set point command C_SE ACTTERM used x No additional definition

Short pulse duration

(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Long pulse duration

(Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation) Persistent output

Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific Parameter)

Counter request x General request counter

x Counter freeze without reset x Request counter group 1 Counter freeze with reset x Request counter group 2 Counter reset x Request counter group 3 Addresses per group have to be specified x Request counter group 4


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-17

Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter)

x Threshold value

Smoothing value Low limit for transmission of measured value High limit for transmission of measured value

Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter)

Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object

File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)

File transfer in monitor direction F_FR_NA_1 File transfer in control direction F_FR_NA_1


B-18 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

B 3 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103

This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions applicable to the P139.

B 3.1 Interoperability

B 3.1.1 Physical Layer

B 3.1.1.1 Electrical Interface

x EIA RS 485

x No. of loads 32 for one device

Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of such loads can be operated on one line. For detailed information see EIA RS 485, Section 3.

B 3.1.1.2 Optical Interface

x Glass fiber

x Plastic fiber

x F-SMA connector

BFOC/2.5 connector

B 3.1.1.3 Transmission Rate

x 9,600 bit/s

x 19,200 bit/s


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-19

B 3.1.2 Link Layer

There are no selection options for the link layer.

B 3.1.3 Application Layer

B 3.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data

Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4 is used exclusively in this companion standard.

B 3.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU

x One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address)

More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU

B 3.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction

B 3.1.3.3.1 System Functions in Monitor Direction INF Description

x <0> End of general interrogation

x <0> Time synchronization

x <2> Reset FCB

x <3> Reset CU

x <4> Start / restart

<5> Power on


B-20 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

B 3.1.3.3.2 Status Indications in Monitor Direction AREVA Designations INF Description Address Description

x <16> Auto-recloser active 015 064 ARC: Enabled

x <17> Teleprotection active 015 008 PSIG: Enabled

x <18> Protection active 003 030 MAIN: Device on-line

x <19> LED reset 021 010 MAIN: Reset indicat. USER

x <20> Blocking of monitor direction 037 075 COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block.

x <21> Test mode 037 071 MAIN: Test mode

<22> Local parameter setting

x <23> Characteristic 1 036 090 PSS: PS 1 active




x <27> Auxiliary input 1 034 000 LOGIC: Input 1 EXT





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-21

B 3.1.3.3.3 Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction AREVA Designations INF Description Address Description

x <32> Measurand supervision I 040 087 MCMON: Meas. circ. I faulty

x <33> Measurand supervision V 038 023 MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty

x <35> Phase sequence supervision 038 049 MCMON: Phase sequ. V faulty

x <36>11 Trip circuit supervision 041 200 SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty

<37> I>> back-up operation

x <38> VT fuse failure 004 061 MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT

x <39> Teleprotection disturbed 036 060 PSIG: Telecom. faulty

x <46> Group warning 036 100 SFMON: Warning (relay)

x <47> Group alarm 004 065 MAIN: Blocked/Faulty

11 The message content is formed from the OR operation of the individual signals.


B-22 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

B 3.1.3.3.4 Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction AREVA Designations INF Description Address Description

x <48> Earth fault L1 041 054 MAIN: Ground fault A

x <49> Earth fault L2 041 055 MAIN: Ground fault B

x <50> Earth fault L3 041 056 MAIN: Ground fault C

x <51> Earth fault forward, i.e. line 041 088 MAIN: Gnd. fault forw./LS

x <52> Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar 041 089 MAIN: Gnd. fault backw./BS


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-23

B 3.1.3.3.5 Fault Indications in Monitor Direction AREVA Designations INF Description Address Description

x <64> Start /pick-up L1 040 005 MAIN: Starting A

x <65> Start /pick-up L3 040 006 MAIN: Starting B

x <66> Start /pick-up L3 040 007 MAIN: Starting C

x <67> Start /pick-up N 040 008 MAIN: Starting GF

x <68> General trip 036 071 MAIN: Gen. trip command 1

<69> Trip L1

<70> Trip L2

<71> Trip L3

<72> Trip I>> (back-up operation)

x <73> Fault location X in ohms 004 029 FT_DA: Fault react., prim.

x <74> Fault forward/line 036 018 SCDD: Fault P forward

x <75> Fault reverse/busbar 036 019 SCDD: Fault P backward

x <76> Teleprotection signal transmitted 036 035 PSIG: Send (signal)

x <77> Teleprotection signal received 037 029 PSIG: Receive (signal)

<78> Zone 1

<79> Zone 2

<80> Zone 3

<81> Zone 4

<82> Zone 5

<83> Zone 6


B-24 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

AREVA Designations INF Description Address Description

x <84> General starting 040 000 MAIN: General starting

x <85> Breaker failure 036 017 CBF: CB failure

<86> Trip measuring system L1



<89> Trip measuring system E

x <90> Trip I> 040 042 MAIN: TripSig. tI>/tIrefP>

x <91> Trip I>> 040 011 DTOC: Trip Signal tI>>

x <92> Trip IN> 040 043 MAIN: TripSig. tIN>/tIrefN>

x <93> Trip IN>> 040 028 DTOC: Trip Signal tIN>>


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-25

B 3.1.3.3.6 Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction AREVA Designations INF Description Address Description

x <128> CB on by AR 037 007 ARC: (Re)close signal HSR

x <129> CB on by long-time AR 037 006 ARC: (Re)close signal TDR

x <130> AR blocked 037 008 ARC: Not ready

B 3.1.3.3.7 Measurands in Monitor Direction AREVA Designations INF Description Address Description

x <144>12 Measurand I 006 041 MAIN: Current B p.u.

x <145>13 Measurands I, V 006 041 005 045

MAIN: Current B p.u. MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u.

x <146>14 Measurands I, V, P, Q 006 041 005 045 004 051 004 053

MAIN: Current B p.u. MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u. MAIN: Active power P p.u. MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u.

x <147>15 Measurands IN, VEN 005 011 005 013

MAIN: Current Σ(IP) p.u. MAIN: Volt. Σ(VPG)/√3 p.u.

x <148>16 Measurands IA,B,C, VA,B,C, P, Q, f 005 041 006 041 007 041 005 043 006 043 007 043 004 051 004 053 004 040

MAIN: Current A p.u. MAIN: Current B p.u. MAIN: Current C p.u. MAIN: Voltage A-G p.u. MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u. MAIN: Voltage C-G p.u. MAIN: Active power P p.u. MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. MAIN: Frequency f

12 only with setting C O M M 1 : T r a n s m . e n a b . c y c l . d a t to "ASDU 3.1 p. IEC" 13 only with setting C O M M 1 : T r a n s m . e n a b . c y c l . d a t to "ASDU 3.2 p. IEC" 14 only with setting C O M M 1 : T r a n s m . e n a b . c y c l . d a t to "ASDU 3.3 p. IEC" 15 only with setting C O M M 1 : T r a n s m . e n a b . c y c l . d a t to "ASDU 3.4 p. IEC" 16 only with setting C O M M 1 : T r a n s m . e n a b . c y c l . d a t to "ASDU 9 p. IEC"


B-26 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

B 3.1.3.3.8 Generic Functions in Monitor Direction INF Description

<240> Read headings of all defined groups

<241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group

<243> Read directory of a single entry

<244> Read value or attribute of a single entry

<245> General interrogation of generic data

<249> Write entry with confirmation

<250> Write entry with execution

<251> Write entry abort


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-27

B 3.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction

B 3.1.3.4.1 System Functions in Control Direction INF Description

x <0> Initiation of general interrogation

x <0> Time synchronization

B 3.1.3.4.2 General Commands in Control Direction AREVA Designations INF Description Address Description

x <16> Auto-recloser on/off 015 060 ARC: General enable USER

x <17> Teleprotection on/off 015 004 PSIG: General enable USER

x <18> Protection on/off 003 030 MAIN: Device on-line

x <19> LED reset 021 010 MAIN: Reset indicat. USER

x <23>17 Activate characteristic 1 003 060 PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER




17 Switches P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R to "Parameter set 1" 18 Switches P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R to "Parameter set 2" 19 Switches P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R to "Parameter set 3" 20 Switches P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R to "Parameter set 4"


B-28 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

B 3.1.3.4.3 Generic Functions in Control Direction INF Description

<240> Read headings of all defined groups

<241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group

<243> Read directory of a single entry

<244> Read value or attribute of a single entry

<245> General interrogation of generic data

<248> Write entry

<249> Write entry with confirmation

<250> Write entry with execution

<251> Write entry abort


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 B-29

B 3.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions

x Test mode

x Blocking of monitor direction

x Disturbance data

Generic services

x Private data

B 3.1.3.6 Miscellaneous

Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value. In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words, there is only one choice for each measurand.

Measured value Max. MVAL = nom. value multiplied by

1,2 or 2,4

Current A x

Current B x

Current C x

Voltage A-G x

Voltage B-G x

Voltage C-G x

Enabled power P x

Reactive power Q x

Frequency f x

Voltage A-B x

B-30 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Appendix C - List of Bay Types

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-1

Key

Sorting the Bay Types The bay types are sorted by the criteria listed below. These criteria are encoded in the first three characters of the bay type code (example: A11.100.R01) given in brackets after the Bay Type No. (example: 2). Sorting is first by "Type of bay" in the order given below, then within each group by the second and third character in ascending order. ! Type of bay " A - Feeder bays " L - Bus sectionalizer bay " Q - Bus coupler bay " K - Bus coupler and sectionalizer bay " M - Busbar measurement bay " E - Busbar grounding bay " X - Other bay type ! Number of busbars " 1 - Single busbar " 2 - Double busbar " 9 - Without busbar / other configurations ! Equipment " 1 - Bays with switch truck or withdrawable switchgear assembly " 2 - Bays with two circuit breakers or switch disconnectors on switch trucks or withdrawable switchgear assembly " 3 - Bays with stationary switchgear units " 5 - Bays with stationary switchgear units and three-position disconnector " 9 - Other bay types

Bay Type No.: This number indicates the value to be set at MAIN: Type of bay (folder "Para/Conf") in order to configure the unit for the selected bay type.

Special Designations for External Devices: Mot.relay: Motor relay Shunt wd. Shunt winding

Appendix C - List of Bay Types (continued)

C-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Table "Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays"

Column "Switchgear unit" This column begins with the designation for the external device (switchgear unit). The function group follows in brackets. The function group encompasses all setting options for monitoring the switchgear unit and its signals. "Open" and "Close(d)" indicate the signal message or control direction of the switchgear unit.

Column "Binary Input": The "Open" or "Closed" signal should be connected to the binary input U xxxx. The connection points of the binary input U xxxx are shown in the terminal connection diagrams.

Column "Output relay" The "Open" or "Close" control of the switchgear unit is effected via output relay K xxxx. The connection points of the output relay K xxxx are shown in the terminal connection diagrams.

Table "Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking"

Note! The interlock equations are stored at substation control level, not at unit level.

Symbols used in the Boolean interlock equations: /: Negation 0: Switchgear unit "Open" I: Switchgear unit "Closed" X: Switchgear unit in intermediate position

FctBl1: Function block 1, configuration at MAIN: Fct .asg. fc t .b lock.1 (Folder "Para/Func/Ctrl")

FctBl2: Function block 2, configuration at MAIN: Fct .asg. fc t .b lock.2 (Folder "Para/Func/Ctrl")


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-3

Bay Type No. 2 (A11.100.R01) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar

Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays

Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay

Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02)

Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02/ /

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking

Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation

Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)

Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking




C-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-5

Bay Type No. 546 (A11.101.M03) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar,direct motor control



Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)

Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/

K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (X0=0) X0 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)





C-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-7




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)





C-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-9




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





C-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) X0 (DEV03) Q15 (DEV04) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)

Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ //

K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (X0=0) X0 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) & (Q15=0)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-11




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Q15 (DEV07)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U C01 U C02

K A01 K A02/ // // /








C-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-13







K A01 K A02/ // // /








C-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 521 (A11.134.R02.1) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar



Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q1 (DEV03) Q81 (DEV04) Q82 (DEV05)

Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B03 U B04

K A01 K A02/ /K A05 K A06/ // /



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(Q1=X) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(Q1=X) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-15

Bay Type No. 519 (A11.135.R02.1) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar



Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q1 (DEV03) Q81 (DEV04) Q82 (DEV05) Q15 (DEV06)

Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B03 U B04 U B05 U B06

K A01 K A02/ /K A05 K A06/ // // /



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(Q1=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(Q1=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0)


C-16 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 7 (A11.200.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar



Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02/ /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-17




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04








C-18 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-19




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /








C-20 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-21

Bay Type No. 12 (A11.400.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar



Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02/ //








C-22 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-23




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02/ // //








C-24 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ //








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-25






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/








C-26 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 17 (A11.900.R01) Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar



X0 (DEV01)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02

K A01 K A02



Interlock equations not defined





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-27

Bay Type No. 504 (A11.901.R00) Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar



X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

/ // /








C-28 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02/ /



Q0 Close(d) /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q0 Close(d) /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-29




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/

K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)





C-30 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-31




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)





C-32 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q9 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)





C-34 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q9 (DEV03) Q8 (DEV04) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)



K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06K B01 K B02/

K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) Q8 Close(d) (Q9=0) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-35




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q9 (DEV03) Q8 (DEV04)



K A01 K A02/ // // /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





C-36 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-37







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06K B01 K B02








C-38 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-39




Q0 (DEV01)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02

K A01 K A02








C-40 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 27 (A13.201.M02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar,direct motor control



Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/

K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-41




Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02/ /



Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





C-42 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-43

Bay Type No. 30 (A13.205.M03) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar,direct motor control





U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/

K B05

K B06








C-44 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-45




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /








C-46 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-47




Q0 (DEV01) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U B05

K A01 K A02/








C-48 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 35 (A13.401.M02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar,direct motor control



Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/

/

K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-49




Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02/ //








C-50 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-51

Bay Type No. 38 (A13.405.M03) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar,direct motor control



Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/

/

K B05

K B06








C-52 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02/ // //








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-53






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ //








C-54 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-55






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/








C-56 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ //



Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)



Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-57






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ //

K B05

K B06



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)





C-58 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/

K B05

K B06



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Q8 Open (Q0=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-59




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


C-60 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /






Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-61




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06






Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) Q8 Open (Q0=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


C-62 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 45 (A21.104.M04) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar,direct motor control



Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) X0 (DEV04) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)




K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) X0 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-63

Bay Type No. 46 (A21.104.R01) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar



Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) X0 (DEV04)



K A01 K A02/ // // /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





C-64 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-65















C-66 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) X0 (DEV04) Q8 (DEV05) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B03 U B04 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06K B01 K B02K B03 K B04/

K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Q8 Close(d) (X0=0) X0 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q8=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (X0=0) X0 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q8=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-67




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) X0 (DEV04) Q8 (DEV05)



K A01 K A02/ // // // /








C-68 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-69







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06K B01 K B02/ /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) X0 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q8=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q8=0)


C-70 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06K B01 K B02K B03 K B04








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-71




Q01 (DEV01) Q02 (DEV02) X01 (DEV03) X02 (DEV04) Q8 (DEV05) Q15 (DEV06) Q25 (DEV07)

Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B03 U B04 U B05 U B06 U C01 U C02

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // // // // /



Q01 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q01 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


C-72 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 54 (A21.204.M04) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar,direct motor control







K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-73

Bay Type No. 55 (A21.204.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar






K A01 K A02/ // // /








C-74 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-75















C-76 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) X0 (DEV04) Q8 (DEV05) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)




K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-77







K A01 K A02/ // // // /








C-78 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-79















C-80 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-81

Bay Type No. 63 (A21.404.M04) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar,direct motor control



Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) X0 (DEV04) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B05 U B06 / /


/

K B05

K B06








C-82 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 64 (A21.404.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar



Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) X0 (DEV04) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B05

K A01 K A02/ // // //








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-83







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ //








C-84 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-85




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) X0 (DEV04) Q8 (DEV05) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B03 U B04 U B05 U B06 / /


/

K B05

K B06








C-86 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) X0 (DEV04) Q8 (DEV05) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B03 U B04 U B05

K A01 K A02/ // // // //








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-87







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // //








C-88 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06K B01 K B02/ //








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-89















C-90 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q01 (DEV01) Q02 (DEV02) X01 (DEV03) X02 (DEV04) Q8 (DEV05)



K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // // /



Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q01 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-91










Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)



Q01 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)


C-92 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33










Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (X01=0) & (X02=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)



Q01 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (X01=0) & (X02=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-93




Q01 (DEV01) Q02 (DEV02) X01 (DEV03) X02 (DEV04) Q9 (DEV05) Q8 (DEV06)



K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // // // /



Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q01 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


C-94 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // /K B03 K B04/ /



Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)



Q01 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-95







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06K B01 K B02K B03 K B04/ /



Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0)



Q01 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0)


C-96 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06K B01 K B02K B03 K B04K B05 K B06



Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (Q9=0) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0)



Q01 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (Q9=0) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-97







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // // /



Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q01 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


C-98 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33










Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)



Q01 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-99










Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (X01=0) & (X02=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)



Q01 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (X01=0) & (X02=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)


C-100 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // // // /



Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q01 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-101







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // /K B03 K B04/ /



Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)



Q01 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0)


C-102 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33










Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0)



Q01 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-103










Q01 Close(d) (Q02=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) (Q01=0) & /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (Q9=0) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0)



Q01 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q9=X) & /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (Q9=0) Q9 Open (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) & (Q02=0) & (Q8=0) X01 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) X02 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0)


C-104 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/

K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-105




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /








C-106 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-107








K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q8=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q8=0) Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0) Q2 Close(d) (Q8=0) Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0)


C-108 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-109







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q8=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q8=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0) Q2 Close(d) (Q8=0)


C-110 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-111








K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)


C-112 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-113















C-114 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) Q9 (DEV04) Q8 (DEV05) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)




K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Q8 Close(d) (Q9=0) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (Q9=0) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-115




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) Q9 (DEV04) Q8 (DEV05)



K A01 K A02/ // // // /








C-116 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33










Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-117















C-118 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/

K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-119




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /








C-120 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-121








K B05

K B06








C-122 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-123







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /








C-124 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-125








K B05

K B06








C-126 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-127















C-128 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33








K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-129







K A01 K A02/ // // // /








C-130 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33










Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q9 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-131















C-132 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/

/

K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-133






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02/ // //








C-134 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-135




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) Q8 (DEV04) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B05 U B06 / /


/

K B05

K B06








C-136 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) Q8 (DEV04) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)



K A01 K A02/ // // //








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-137







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ //








C-138 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-139

Bay Type No. 222 (A25.105.M03.1) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar,direct motor control






K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ //

K B05

K B06



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q8=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q8=0)



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0) Q2 Close(d) (Q8=0)


C-140 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ //

K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-141








K B05

K B06



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q8=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q8=0) Q8 Open (Q0=I) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0) Q2 Close(d) (Q8=0) Q8 Open (Q0=I) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


C-142 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33








K B05

K B06



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q8=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q8=0) Q8 Open (Q0=I) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & (FctBl2=I)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-143

Bay Type No. 123 (A25.105.R01.1) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar






K A01 K A02/ // // /



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





C-144 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-145







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /








C-146 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-147















C-148 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-149







K A01 K A02/ // // // /



Q0 Open (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





C-150 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33










Q0 Open (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Q81 Open (Q0=I) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q82 Open (Q0=I) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q0 Open (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Close(d) (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Q2 Close(d) (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Q81 Open (Q0=I) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q82 Open (Q0=I) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-151

Bay Type No. 133 (L11.100.R01) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar



Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02/ /








C-152 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 553 (L11.100.R01.2) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar



Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02/ /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-153




Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04








C-154 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-155




Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /








C-156 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-157




Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /








C-158 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06



Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (X01=0) & (Q8=I) X01 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-159

Bay Type No. 547 (L11.112.M04) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar,direct motor control



Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03) Q16 (DEV04) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)




K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I) Q16 Close(d) (Q16=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=0) & (Q16=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=0) & (Q16=0)


C-160 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // /



Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-161




Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /



Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)





C-162 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-163




Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06



Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X01 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) X02 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X01 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) X02 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)


C-164 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) X01 (DEV03) X02 (DEV04) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)



K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ //

K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (X01=0) & (X02=0) X01 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-165

Bay Type No. 552 (L11.120.M03.2) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar,direct motor control



Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) X01 (DEV03) X02 (DEV04) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)



K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ //

K B05

K B06








C-166 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03) Q8 (DEV04)



K A01 K A02/ // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-167







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /



Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X01 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X01 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)


C-168 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /K B01 K B02








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-169










Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (X01=0) & (X02=0) X01 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q8 Close(d) (X01=0) & (X02=0) X01 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) X02 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)


C-170 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03) Q81 (DEV04) Q82 (DEV05)



K A01 K A02/ // // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-171







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // //

K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Q12 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0)





C-172 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33








K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Q12 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Q81 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q11=0) & (Q12=0) Q82 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q11=0) & (Q12=0)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-173







K A01 K A02/ // // // /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


C-174 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-175







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /K B01 K B02/ /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Q81 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q11=0) & (Q12=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q81=0) & (Q82=0) Q81 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q11=0) & (Q12=0)


C-176 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-177

Bay Type No. 148 (L13.200.R01) Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar



Q0 (DEV01)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02

K A01 K A02








C-178 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q15 (DEV02) Q16 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /



Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-179




Q0 (DEV01) Q15 (DEV02) Q16 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06



Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q15 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=I) Q16 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q16=I)



Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q15 Close(d) (Q0=0) Q16 Close(d) (Q0=0)


C-180 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // //

K B05

K B06



Q0 Open (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=0) Q12 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q16=0)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-181








K B05

K B06



Q0 Open (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=0) Q12 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q16=0) Q15 Open (Q0=I) & (Q12=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q11=0) & (Q12=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) & (Q15=I) Q16 Open (Q0=I) & (Q11=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q12=0) & (Q11=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) & (Q16=I)



Q0 Open (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=0) Q12 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q16=0) Q15 Open (Q0=I) & (Q12=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q11=0) & (Q12=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q16 Open (Q0=I) & (Q11=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q12=0) & (Q11=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


C-182 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-183







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // /








C-184 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-185

Bay Type No. 154 (L21.101.M04.1) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, double busbar,direct motor control







K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) Q12 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) X0 Open (Q0=0) & (Q11=0) & (Q12=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q11=0) & (Q12=0)





C-186 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33








K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-187

Bay Type No. 156 (L21.101.R01.1) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, double busbar






K A01 K A02/ // // /








C-188 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-189







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) Q12 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)





C-190 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-191















C-192 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-193







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & /(X0=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Q12 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)





C-194 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-195

Bay Type No. 162 (L23.101.R02) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, double busbar



Q01 (DEV01) Q02 (DEV02) Q11 (DEV03) Q12 (DEV04) Q21 (DEV05) Q22 (DEV06)



K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // // // /



Q01 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q21=X) & /(Q22=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)



Q01 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q21=X) & /(Q22=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


C-196 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 163 (L23.101.R06) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, double busbar



Q01 (DEV01) Q02 (DEV02) Q11 (DEV03) Q12 (DEV04) Q21 (DEV05) Q22 (DEV06)






Q01 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q21=X) & /(Q22=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) Q12 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) Q21 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0) Q22 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0)



Q01 Close(d) /(Q11=X) & /(Q12=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q02 Close(d) /(Q21=X) & /(Q22=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q11 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) Q12 Open (Q01=0) Close(d) (Q01=0) Q21 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0) Q22 Open (Q02=0) Close(d) (Q02=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-197

Bay Type No. 554 (L23.901.M01.1) Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar,direct motor control



Q11 (DEV01) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02/

K B05

K B06








C-198 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33





Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02/

K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-199

Bay Type No. 164 (L23.901.R02) Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar



Q11 (DEV01) Q21 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04



Q11 Open (Q11=0) Close(d) (Q11=I) Q21 Open (Q21=0) Close(d) (Q21=I)





C-200 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02/ // //

K B05

K B06



Q12 Open (Q12=0) Close(d) (Q12=I)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-201






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02/ // //

K B05

K B06



Q21 Open (Q21=0) Close(d) (Q21=I)





C-202 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 511 (L23.903.M02) Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar,direct motor control






K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // //

K B05

K B06



Q11 Open (Q11=0) Close(d) (Q11=I) Q21 Open (Q21=0) Close(d) (Q21=I)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-203







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // //

K B05

K B06








C-204 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // //

K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-205








K B05

K B06








C-206 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33








K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-207







K A01 K A02/ // // // /








C-208 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-209







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // /








C-210 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-211















C-212 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-213

Bay Type No. 505 (Q21.100.R01) Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar



Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02/ /








C-214 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 197 (Q21.101.M04) Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar,direct motor control







K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-215







K A01 K A02/ // // /








C-216 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-217















C-218 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33








K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I) Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-219

Bay Type No. 565 (Q21.112.M04.2) Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar,direct motor control







K B05

K B06



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I) Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0)


C-220 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q10 (DEV02) Q20 (DEV03) Q11 (DEV04) Q21 (DEV05) X0 (DEV06)



K A01 K A02/ // // // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-221















C-222 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-223







K A01 K A02/ // // /








C-224 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-225






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/

K B05

K B06








C-226 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q0 (DEV01) Q10 (DEV02) Q20 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-227




Q0 (DEV01) Q10 (DEV02) Q20 (DEV03)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06








C-228 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-229















C-230 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ //

K B05

K B06



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q10 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Q20 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q10 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Q20 Open (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-231








K B05

K B06



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q10 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Q20 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Q8 Open (Q0=I) & (Q20=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q10=0) & (Q20=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) & (Q8=I)



Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q10 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Q20 Open (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Q8 Open (Q0=I) & (Q20=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q10=0) & (Q20=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


C-232 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-233







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /








C-234 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33













Q0 Open (Q8=0) Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q10 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Q20 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0) Q8 Open (Q0=I) & (Q20=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q10=0) & (Q20=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-235







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ //

K B05

K B06








C-236 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33








K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-237







K A01 K A02/ // // /








C-238 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-239















C-240 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // //

K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-241








K B05

K B06



Q0 Open (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q10 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=0) Q15 Open (Q0=I) & (Q20=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q10=0) & (Q20=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) & (Q15=I) Q20 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q25=0) Q25 Open (Q0=I) & (Q10=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q20=0) & (Q10=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) & (Q25=I)



Q0 Open (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q10 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=0) Q15 Open (Q0=I) & (Q20=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q10=0) & (Q20=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q20 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q25=0) Q25 Open (Q0=I) & (Q10=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q20=0) & (Q10=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


C-242 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02/ // // // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-243







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // /








C-244 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33










Q0 Open (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q10 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=0) Q15 Open (Q0=I) & (Q20=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q10=0) & (Q20=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) & (Q15=I) Q20 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q25=0) Q25 Open (Q0=I) & (Q10=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q20=0) & (Q10=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) & (Q25=I)



Q0 Open (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & (Q15=0) & (Q25=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q10 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=0) Q15 Open (Q0=I) & (Q20=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q10=0) & (Q20=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q20 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q25=0) Q25 Open (Q0=I) & (Q10=I) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q20=0) & (Q10=I) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-245

Bay Type No. 218 (K29.101.R02) Bus coupler and sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, double busbar



Q0 (DEV01) Q10 (DEV02) Q20 (DEV03) Q11 (DEV04) Q21 (DEV05) X0 (DEV06) Q1 (DEV07) Q2 (DEV08)

Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B03 U B04 U B05 U B06 U C01 U C02 U C03 U C04

/ /K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/ // // // // /



Q10 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q20=0) Q20 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q10=0)



Q10 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q20=0) Q20 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q10=0)


C-246 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 219 (K29.101.R06) Bus coupler and sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, double busbar



Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) Q11 (DEV04) Q21 (DEV05) X0 (DEV06) Q10 (DEV07) Q20 (DEV08)

Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B03 U B04 U B05 U B06 U C01 U C02 U C03 U C04

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06K B01 K B02K B03 K B04K B05 K B06/ // /



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(X0=X) & /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Q11 Open (Q0=I) & (Q1=I) & (Q10=I) & (X0=I) Close(d) (Q0=I) & (Q1=I) & (Q10=I) & (X0=I) Q2 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Q21 Open (Q0=I) & (Q2=I) & (Q20=I) & (X0=I) Close(d) (Q0=I) & (Q2=I) & (Q20=I) & (X0=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q10=0) & (Q20=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q10=0) & (Q20=0)



Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(X0=X) & /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I) Q1 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0) Q11 Open (Q0=I) & (Q1=I) & (Q10=I) & (X0=I) Close(d) (Q0=I) & (Q1=I) & (Q10=I) & (X0=I) Q2 Open (Q0=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) Q21 Open (Q0=I) & (Q2=I) & (Q20=I) & (X0=I) Close(d) (Q0=I) & (Q2=I) & (Q20=I) & (X0=I) X0 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q10=0) & (Q20=0) Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & (Q2=0) & (Q10=0) & (Q20=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-247

Bay Type No. 171 (M11.300.R00) Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar



X0 (DEV01) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U B05

/ //








C-248 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




X0 (DEV01) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U B05

K A01 K A02/








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-249






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/



Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)





C-250 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 173 (M11.900.R00) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar



X0 (DEV01)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02

/ /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-251




X0 (DEV01)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02

K A01 K A02








C-252 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 175 (M13.312.M02) Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar,direct motor control



Q1 (DEV01) Q15 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/

/

K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-253






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02/ //








C-254 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-255




Q1 (DEV01)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02

/ /








C-256 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 232 (M15.903.M01) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar,direct motor control





U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02/ //

K B05

K B06



Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)



Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-257

Bay Type No. 178 (M15.903.M02) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar,direct motor control





U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/

K B05

K B06



Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0) Q8 Close(d) (Q1=0)





C-258 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q1 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02/ /



Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)



Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-259




Q1 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04








C-260 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 180 (M21.302.R02) Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar



Q1 (DEV01) Q2 (DEV02) X01 (DEV03) X02 (DEV04) F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012)



K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // //

/








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-261








/



X01 Open (Q1=0) Close(d) (Q1=0) X02 Open (Q2=0) Close(d) (Q2=0)





C-262 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // //

/



Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I) Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-263








/








C-264 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 184 (M21.902.R02) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar



Q1 (DEV01) Q2 (DEV02) X01 (DEV03) X02 (DEV04)



K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-265















C-266 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-267















C-268 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q1 (DEV01) Q2 (DEV02) F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05 U B06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/

/








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-269




Q15 (DEV01) Q25 (DEV02) F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05 U B06

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/

/








C-270 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 190 (M23.328.M04) Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar,direct motor control



Q1 (DEV01) Q2 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03) Q25 (DEV04) F2 (SIG_1: Signal S010) F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) Mot.relay (SIG_1: Signal S012) Shunt wd. (CMD_1: Command C011) Mot.relay (CMD_1: Command C012)




/

/

K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-271




Q1 (DEV01) Q2 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03) Q25 (DEV04) F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012)



K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // //

/








C-272 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q1 (DEV01) Q2 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03) Q25 (DEV04) F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012)




/








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-273




Q1 (DEV01) Q2 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04








C-274 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q15 (DEV01)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02

/ /








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-275

Bay Type No. 509 (M23.906.M01) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar,direct motor control





U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02/ //

K B05

K B06








C-276 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/

K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-277




Q25 (DEV01)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02

/ /








C-278 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02/ //

K B05

K B06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-279






U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/

K B05

K B06








C-280 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




Q15 (DEV01) Q25 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-281







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // //

K B05

K B06








C-282 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33








K B05

K B06



Q1 Close(d) (Q81=0) Q2 Close(d) (Q82=0) Q81 Close(d) (Q1=0) Q82 Close(d) (Q2=0)





P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-283







K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ // /








C-284 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33















P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-285

Bay Type No. 129 (E13.901.M01) Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar,direct motor control




Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02/

K B05

K B06








C-286 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 130 (E13.901.R01) Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar



Q15 (DEV01)

Open Close(d)

U A01 U A02

K A01 K A02








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-287

Bay Type No. 131 (E23.903.M02) Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar,direct motor control





U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B06 / /

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/

K B05

K B06








C-288 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 132 (E23.903.R02) Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar



Q15 (DEV01) Q25 (DEV02)


U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04

K A01 K A02K A03 K A04








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-289

Bay Type No. 1 (X99.901.R00) Other bay type with other switchgear unit, without busbar










C-290 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Bay Type No. 980 (X99.902.R06.2) Other bay type with other switchgear unit, without busbar


Signal / Command Binary input Output relay

S001 (SIG_1: Signal S001) S002 (SIG_1: Signal S002) S003 (SIG_1: Signal S003) S004 (SIG_1: Signal S004) S005 (SIG_1: Signal S005) S006 (SIG_1: Signal S006) C001 (CMD_1: Command C001) C002 (CMD_1: Command C002) C003 (CMD_1: Command C003) C004 (CMD_1: Command C004) C005 (CMD_1: Command C005) C006 (CMD_1: Command C006)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 / / / / / /

/

/

/

/

/

/

K A01

K A02

K A03

K A04

K A05

K A06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-291




S001 (SIG_1: Signal S001) S002 (SIG_1: Signal S002) S003 (SIG_1: Signal S003) S004 (SIG_1: Signal S004) S005 (SIG_1: Signal S005) S006 (SIG_1: Signal S006) S007 (SIG_1: Signal S007) S008 (SIG_1: Signal S008) S009 (SIG_1: Signal S009) S010 (SIG_1: Signal S010) S011 (SIG_1: Signal S011) S012 (SIG_1: Signal S012) C001 (CMD_1: Command C001) C002 (CMD_1: Command C002) C003 (CMD_1: Command C003) C004 (CMD_1: Command C004) C005 (CMD_1: Command C005) C006 (CMD_1: Command C006) C007 (CMD_1: Command C007) C008 (CMD_1: Command C008) C009 (CMD_1: Command C009) C010 (CMD_1: Command C010) C011 (CMD_1: Command C011) C012 (CMD_1: Command C012)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B03 U B04 U B05 U B06 / / / / / / / / / / / /

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

K A01

K A02

K A03

K A04

K A05

K A06

K B01

K B02

K B03

K B04

K B05

K B06








C-292 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33




S001 (SIG_1: Signal S001) S002 (SIG_1: Signal S002) S003 (SIG_1: Signal S003) S004 (SIG_1: Signal S004) S005 (SIG_1: Signal S005) S006 (SIG_1: Signal S006) S007 (SIG_1: Signal S007) S008 (SIG_1: Signal S008) S009 (SIG_1: Signal S009) S010 (SIG_1: Signal S010) S011 (SIG_1: Signal S011) S012 (SIG_1: Signal S012) S013 (SIG_1: Signal S013) S014 (SIG_1: Signal S014) C001 (CMD_1: Command C001) C002 (CMD_1: Command C002) C003 (CMD_1: Command C003) C004 (CMD_1: Command C004) C005 (CMD_1: Command C005) C006 (CMD_1: Command C006)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U C01 U C02 U C03 U C04 U C05 U C06 U C07 U C08 / / / / / /

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

K A01

K A02

K A03

K A04

K A05

K A06








P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 C-293




S001 (SIG_1: Signal S001) S002 (SIG_1: Signal S002) S003 (SIG_1: Signal S003) S004 (SIG_1: Signal S004) S005 (SIG_1: Signal S005) S006 (SIG_1: Signal S006) S007 (SIG_1: Signal S007) S008 (SIG_1: Signal S008) S009 (SIG_1: Signal S009) S010 (SIG_1: Signal S010) S011 (SIG_1: Signal S011) S012 (SIG_1: Signal S012) S013 (SIG_1: Signal S013) S014 (SIG_1: Signal S014) S015 (SIG_1: Signal S015) S016 (SIG_1: Signal S016) S017 (SIG_1: Signal S017) S018 (SIG_1: Signal S018) S019 (SIG_1: Signal S019) S020 (SIG_1: Signal S020) C001 (CMD_1: Command C001) C002 (CMD_1: Command C002) C003 (CMD_1: Command C003) C004 (CMD_1: Command C004) C005 (CMD_1: Command C005) C006 (CMD_1: Command C006) C007 (CMD_1: Command C007) C008 (CMD_1: Command C008) C009 (CMD_1: Command C009) C010 (CMD_1: Command C010) C011 (CMD_1: Command C011) C012 (CMD_1: Command C012)

U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B01 U B02 U B03 U B04 U B05 U B06 U C01 U C02 U C03 U C04 U C05 U C06 U C07 U C08 / / / / / / / / / / / /

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

/

K A01

K A02

K A03

K A04

K A05

K A06

K B01

K B02

K B03

K B04

K B05

K B06


C-294 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33







Appendix D - Terminal Connection Diagrams

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 D-1

D 1 Terminal Connection Diagrams

D 1.1 Case 40 T

LOCATION ITEM

REFER.ITEM DESIGN.ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING REFER.

Voltage VAGVoltage VAG

Voltage VBGVoltage VBG

Voltage VCGVoltage VCG

Displacem. volt. VNGDisplacem. volt. VNG

Voltage VrefVoltage Vref

Phase current APhase current AIA

IB

IC

IN

Phase current BPhase current B

Phase current CPhase current C

Phase current INPhase current IN

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION


CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Alternative moduleAlternative module

(see order inform.)(see order inform.)

LOCATION


CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION


CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION


CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

19Y5140B_Xa_EN D-1 Terminal connection diagram P139 in case 40 T, pin terminal connection, diagram P139.405, (part 1 of 6)

Terminal connection diagram of the NCIT and RTD modules: see Chapters 5.3 and 5.4.

Appendix D - Terminal Connection Diagrams (continued)

D-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

19Y5241C_EN

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

An. outp. ch.1 (A-1)


Input channel 1(I-1)

Measur. input PT100

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

DESIGN

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

D-2 Terminal connection diagram P139 in case 40 T, pin terminal connection, diagram P139.405, (part 2 of 6)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 D-3

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Aux. voltage input

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.



D-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.



P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 D-5

19Y5044C_Xa_EN

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

PC interface

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Operation

MAIN: Blocked/faulty

SFMON: Warning (LED)

MAIN: Gen. trip signal

Edit mode

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

Voltage

test

prohibited

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Comm. interface

Channel 1

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Comm. interface

Channel 1

Comm. interface

Channel 1

Comm. interface

Channel 2

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

D-5 Terminal connection diagram P139 in case 40 T, pin terminal connection, diagram P139.405, (part 5 of 6) in case 40 T, diagram


D-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

-

+

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

+

-

-X31

P139_COMM3_01A_EN

ITEM

REFER.

*

RS 485

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

E

X / Y

1

2

3

4

5

1

X / Y1

* : Alternative module

(see order inform.)

ST

AT

US REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

-X32

ITEM

REFER.

*

ST

AT

US REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

-X33

ITEM

REFER.

*

ST

AT

US REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

-X34

ITEM

REFER.

*

ST

AT

US REFER.

+

-

+

-

+

-

-U22

-U24

-U27

-U23

Active interface

[--- ---]

Active interface

[--- ---]

Active interface

[--- ---]

Active interface

[--- ---]

-

+

X // Y

D2[R]

D1[T]

D1[T]

D2[R]

RS 232

E2[G]

X // Y

M5[DCD]

+UB

D-6 Terminal connection diagram in case 40 T, pin terminal connection, diagram P139.405, (part 6 of 6)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 D-7

19Y5250A_EN

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Voltage VAG

Voltage VAG

Voltage VAG

Displacem. volt. VNG

Tension Vref

Phase current A

Phase current B

Phase current C

Residual current IN

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

D-7 Terminal connection diagram in case 40T, transformer module: ring terminal connection, other modules: pin terminal connection, diagram P139.406, (part 1 of 6); Terminal connection diagram of the RTD module: see Chapter 5.4.


D-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

19Y5241C_EN

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.




Measur. input PT100

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

DESIGN

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

D-8 Terminal connection diagram in case 40 T, transformer module: ring terminal connection, other modules: pin terminal connection, diagram

P139.406, (part 2 of 6)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 D-9

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Aux. voltage input

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.


P139.406, (part 3 of 6)


D-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

D-10 Terminal connection diagram in case 40 T, transformer module: ring terminal connection diagram, other modules: pin terminal connection,

diagram P139.406, (part 4 of 6)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 D-11

19Y5044C_Xa_EN

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

PC interface

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Operation




Edit mode

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

Voltage

test

prohibited

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Comm. interface

Channel 1

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Comm. interface

Channel 1

Comm. interface

Channel 1

Comm. interface

Channel 2

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.


P139.406, (part 5 of 6)


D-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

-

+

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

+

-

-X31

P139_COMM3_01A_EN

ITEM

REFER.

*

RS 485

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

E

X / Y

1

2

3

4

5

1

X / Y1


(see order inform.)

ST

AT

US REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

-X32

ITEM

REFER.

*

ST

AT

US REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

-X33

ITEM

REFER.

*

ST

AT

US REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

-X34

ITEM

REFER.

*

ST

AT

US REFER.

+

-

+

-

+

-

-U22

-U24

-U27

-U23

Active interface

[--- ---]

Active interface

[--- ---]

Active interface

[--- ---]

Active interface

[--- ---]

-

+

X // Y

D2[R]

D1[T]

D1[T]

D2[R]

RS 232

E2[G]

X // Y

M5[DCD]

+UB

D-12 Terminal connection diagram P139 in case 40 T, transformer module: ring terminal connection, other modules: pin terminal connection, diagram

P139.406, (part 6 of 6)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 D-13

D 1.2 Case 84 T

-X121LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Voltage VAG

Voltage VBG

Voltage VCG

Displacem. volt. VNG

Voltage Vref

Phase current A

Phase current B

Phase current C

Residual current IN

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

19Y5145B_Xa_EN

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

D-13 Terminal connection diagram P139 in case 84T, ring terminal connection, diagram P139.407, (part 1 of 6)

Terminal connection diagram of the NCIT and RTD modules see Chapters 5.3 and 5.4.


D-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

-X141 -X161

-

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTION

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

19Y5146B_Xa_EN

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

DESIGN.

REFER.




Measur. input PT100

D-14 Terminal connection diagram P139 in case 84 T, ring terminal connection, diagram P139.407, (part 2 of 6)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 D-15

D-15 Terminal connection diagram P139 in case 84 T, ring terminal connection , diagram P139.407, (part 3 of 6)


D-16 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

-X201

-X181

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

Aux. voltage input

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

K1804

19Y5148B_Xa_EN D-16 Terminal connection diagram P139 in case 84 T, ring terminal connection, diagram P139.407, (part 4 of 6)


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 D-17

19Y5044C_Xa_EN

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

PC interface

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Operation




Edit mode

Alternative module

(see order inform.)

Voltage

test

prohibited

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Comm. interface

Channel 1

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

Comm. interface

Channel 1

Comm. interface

Channel 1

Comm. interface

Channel 2

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

ITEM

REFER.

REFER.



D-18 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

-

+

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

+

-

-X31

P139_COMM3_01A_EN

ITEM

REFER.

*

RS 485

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

E

X / Y

1

2

3

4

5

1

X / Y1


(see order inform.)

ST

AT

US REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

-X32

ITEM

REFER.

*

ST

AT

US REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

-X33

ITEM

REFER.

*

ST

AT

US REFER.

LOCATION

ITEM DESIGN.

CONNECTOR

MEANING

-X34

ITEM

REFER.

*

ST

AT

US REFER.

+

-

+

-

+

-

-U22

-U24

-U27

-U23

Active interface

[--- ---]

Active interface

[--- ---]

Active interface

[--- ---]

Active interface

[--- ---]

-

+

X // Y

D2[R]

D1[T]

D1[T]

D2[R]

RS 232

E2[G]

X // Y

M5[DCD]

+UB



P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 D-19

D 1.3 Terminal Connection Diagram of the NCIT Module

D-19 Terminal connection diagram of the NCIT module

applicable to case 40 T, pin terminal connection, diagram P139.405 and to case 84 T, ring terminal connection, diagram P139.407


D-20 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

D 1.4 RTD Module for PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120

D-20 Terminal connection diagram of the RTD module

applicable to case 40 T, pin terminal connection, diagram P139.405 case 40 T, transformer module: ring terminal connection, other modules: pin terminal connection, diagram P139.406 and to case 84 T, ring terminal connection, diagram P139.407 The RTD module is provided with a ground bus with terminals for the 9 cable shields.

Appendix F - Upgrade Documentation

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 F-1

Version Changes

P139-301-401-601 Initial product release Release: 27.04.2001

P139-302-402/403/404-602 Release: 07.02.2002

Hardware As an alternative slot 4 can now be equipped with the 5-pole voltage transformer module T (for the Automatic Synchronism Check function) Additional to the 40 TE case variant with pin-terminal connection there is now an 84 TE case variant with ring-terminal connection as well as a 40 TE case variant with a combination of pin- and ring-terminal connection (transformer module: for ring-terminal connection; other modules: for pin-terminal connection)

The binary (I/O) module X (6xO) is now optionally available with rapid-response output by 4 thyristors.

Diagram The updated connection diagrams now include the 5-pole voltage transformer module T and show the variants with ring-terminal connection:

! P139.402 (for 40 TE case, with pin-terminal connection)

! P139.403 (for 84 TE case, with ring-terminal connection)

! P139.404 (for 40 TE case, transformer module: with ring-terminal connection; other modules: with pin-terminal connection)

Software

LOC Measurands previously missing are now included in the selection of the Operation Panel, Overload Panel and Ground Fault Panel: MEASI: Current IDC (addr. 004.134) MEASI: Current IDC p.u. (addr. 004.135) MEASI: Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. (addr. 004.136) MEASI: Current A-1 (addr. 005.100) MEASI: Current A-2 (addr. 005.099) Bug fixing: Control actions from the local control panel are now no longer rejected in the DNP3 protocol.

PC User-defined signal selections for the PC interface can now be made by setting PC: Select. Spontan.sig. (addr. 003.189), and these selected signals are spontaneously transmitted in addition to the VDEW signals.

The PC interface "Time-out" can now be set with the parameter PC: Time-out (addr. 003.188).

COMM1 The COURIER protocol has now been implemented.

User-defined signal selections for the protocol IEC 60870-5-103 can now be made by setting COMM1: Select. Spontan.sig. (addr. 003.179), and these selected signals are spontaneously transmitted in addition to the VDEW signals.

COMM2 Logical communication interface 2 (function group COMM2) added to communication.

Appendix F - Upgrade Documentation (continued)

F-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Version Changes

OUTP/LED Addition of function assignment to output relays and LED indicators with these signals:

SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 (addr. 097.000) to SFMON: Defect.module slot20 (addr. 097.019) Now defective modules can be indicated by output relays for instance.

MEASI Addition of this per unit measurand MEASI: Temperature p.u. (addr. 004.221)

MAIN The following signals were added to the parameter setting selection tables for the trip command blocking signals: COMM1: Command block. EXT (addr. 003.173) COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT (addr. 037.074) OUTP: Block outp.rel. EXT (addr. 040.014) MAIN: Test mode EXT (addr. 037.070) MAIN: Trip cmd. block. EXT (addr. 036.045) The following signals were added to the selection table for GRUND: Fct. assign. fault: SFMON: Defect.module slot 5 (addr. 097 004) SFMON: Defect.module slot18 (addr. 097.017) SFMON: Error K 1201 ... K 1206 (addr. 097.118 to 097.123) The following settings for the 5th VT input were added to the MAIN function group: MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. prim. (addr. 010.100) MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. sec. (addr. 031.052) MAIN: Meas. val. rel. Vref (addr. 011.034) The direct time output signals of the 32 logic equations are now available to the function assignment of trip command 1 and trip command 2.

In addition to the standard procedure to determine energy output a second procedure is now available. The selection of the procedure depends on the given load ratio and is made by setting MAIN: Op. mode energy cnt. (addr. 010.138). The physical communication channel assignment to the "logical" communication interfaces COMM1 and COMM2 can be set with the parameter MAIN: Chann Assign.Comaddr. 003.169).


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 F-3

Version Changes MAIN

(continued) Addition of two measured operating values: MAIN: Voltage Vref prim. (addr. 005.046) MAIN: Voltage Vref p.u. (addr. 005.047) Incorrect termination is now fixed for the close commands issued by the control function and terminated with the starting of the trip command.

Time switching to setting "Daylight saving time" MAIN: Time switching (addr. 003.095) is now stored so that it will remain valid after a warm restart.

The multiple signal MAIN: Gen. trip signal (addr. 036.251 is now supported.

Bug fixing: Rated current setting is changed from 1A to 5A when electro-magnetic interference occurs. To confirm settings the internal values of MAIN: Inom device (addr. 010.003) and MAIN: IN,nom device (addr. 010.026) are overwritten by the set values once every software cycle.

A disabled residual current system protection, which is displayed by the signal MAIN: System IN disabled (addr. 040.134) is now considered by the DTOC and IDMT residual current stages.

Bug fixing: During incrementation of the overflow counter for active and reactive energy output and input a negative value of the integrated count is now prevented.

MAIN ARC ASC PSIG

In addition to enabling or disabling of the functions Auto-reclosing Control, Automatic Synchronism Check, Protective Signaling and Residual Current System protection by using two binary signal inputs it is now possible to use just one binary signal input for enabling or disabling. If, for example, only the signal ARC: Enable EXT (addr. 0037.010) is assigned to one binary signal input, the function is enabled by the rising edge and disabled by the falling edge of the input signal.

DTOC Step size for thresholds I>, I>> and I>>> reduced from 0.1 Inom to 0.01 Inom.

ARC New function Automatic Synchronism Check (ASC) is taken into account by the Auto-reclosing Control (ARC) function. The signal ARC: (Re)close request (addr. 037.077) is used in this context to have ASC triggered by ARC.

ASC Function Automatic Synchronism Check (ASC) has been added. The transformer module T with a fifth VT is required to provide a reference voltage.

GFDSS A fixed time delayed reset of 80 ms is now implemented for the stage GFDS: VNG> (addr. 016.062).

THERM Addition of these per unit measurands THERM: Therm. replica p.u. (addr. 004.017) THERM: Coolant temp. p.u. (addr. 004.178) THERM: Object temp. p.u. (addr. 004.179).


F-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Version Changes

f<> Bug fixing: With the selection of a measurement loop the amplitude of the phase-to-ground loops was incorrectly rated by the factor √3.

MCMON Reference voltage monitoring is now included in the measuring-circuit monitoring function with the signals MCMON: FF, Vref triggered (addr. 038.100) MCMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. (addr. 004.078).

SIG_1 Bug fixing: When the VDEW addition to the protocol IEC60870-5-103 was used single-pole signals were signaled in the data byte with the value '0' (end) or '1' (start).

COUNT The dimension (min) was added to the parameter COUNT: Cycle t.count transm (addr. 217.007) in the data model.

SFMON Because of the addition of a fifth VT these warning signals were added: SFMON: FF, Vref triggered (addr. 098.022) SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. (addr. 098.023) Addition of function assignment to warnings by the delayed and direct time signals from logic equations 30 to 32. The signals included in the function selection of warnings SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. (addr. 098.026) SFMON: PT100 open circuit (addr. 098.024) SFMON: Overload 20 mA input (addr. 098.025) are now supported.

P139-302-402/403/404-602-701 Release: 13.05.2002

Hardware No modifications

Diagram No modifications

Software

SFMON Decreased severity for entries in the monitoring signal memory during short-time supply voltage dipping.

P139-302-402/403/404-602-702 Release: 26.07.2002



Software

IDMT Accuracy of tripping time is improved. Particularly the characteristic 'IEC extremely inverse' is now within the claimed tolerance range.

P139-302-402/403/404-603 Release: 29.08.2002



Software


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 F-5

Version Changes

LOC The signals LOC: Loc.acc.block.active (addr. 221.005) and LOC: Rem.acc.block.active (addr. 221.004) are now sent spontaneously as individual signals with the protocol IEC 60870-5-103.

INP The function assignment of the binary signal inputs U 1001 to U 1006, which are not present on slot 10, have been removed from the data model.

P139-303-402/403/404-604 Release: 20.12.2002

Hardware Device is prepared for the supplementary fitting with the new temperature p/c board (RTD module), which will become available as of version -304-405/406/407-605.


Software

COMM1 The measurand MAIN: Voltage Vref p.u. (addr. 005.047) has been added to the selection for the cyclic ILS telegram.

The unnecessary parameter COMM1: Address mode (Adr. 003.168) is now hidden.

LOC The measurand MAIN: Voltage Vref prim. (addr. 005.046) has been added to the function assignment for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel and the numerical display. The measurand MAIN: Voltage Vref p.u. (addr. 005.047) has been added to the function assignment for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel and the bar chart display.

MEASI THERM LIMIT SFMON

Functions have been enhanced in preparation for the supplementary fitting with the new temperature p/c board (RTD module). For THERM protection this includes direct temperature monitoring, temperature measurement, coolant temperature acquisition, and open-circuit monitoring of the individual resistance thermometers.

MAIN ARC ASC PSIG

The functionality of equal-priority enabling or disabling a function via any device interface, first introduced with version 603, now is modified in that way, that the functions are enabled by default.

IDMT The setting ranges for parameters Iref,neg and Iref,N as well as Iref,neg dynamic and Iref,N dynam have been increased from 0,1 - 4,00 Inom to 0,01 - 4,00 Inom

PSS Bug fixing: After a warm restart of the device an externally set parameter subset fell back to the user set parameter subset. The signal PSS: Control via user (addr. 036.102) changed from "Yes" to "No" after a warm restart.


F-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Version Changes

ASC Setting to continuous synchronism test procedure after a test close request: When a test close request is issued the operative time is not terminated by the starting of the close enable but will continue until it has reached its set time duration. Synchronism is continuously checked, even after the first close enable, as long as the operative time is running. The signal ASC: Close enable (addr. 037.083) (if synchronism conditions are met) and the delta measured values are continuously updated and periodically transmitted by the device interfaces. The cycle time to transmit the telegram with the measured values is set at: ASC: Transm.cycle,meas.v. (addr. 101.212).

The signal close enable is signaled spontaneously both as "start" and as "end" and must therefore be included in a general scan.

The signal ASC: Close rejection (addr. 037.086) is issued only after the operative time has elapsed and there is then no synchronism. This signal is also issued after a test close request if, during the operative time, a close enable is temporarily signaled.

The number of test close requests and the number of close rejections after test close requests are not counted, e.g. the counters ASC: No. close requests (addr. 009.033) and ASC: No. close rejections (addr. 009.034) will only consider "authentic" close requests.

If during the operative time (after a test close request) there is an authentic close request issued by the device control function (HMI) or from the interfaces (or the ARC) the test run is terminated and ASC is restarted. Then, after the first close enable is reached, the close command is issued and the operative time is terminated. The signal ASC: Close rejection (addr. 037.086) is issued when the set operative time has elapsed without synchronism conditions having been met and the circuit breaker is not switched.

The setting range for the operative time was increased from 0.00 60.00 s to 0.0 6000.0 s and the step range was reduced from 0.01 s to 0.1 s.

The settable reset times for the signals ASC: tClose enable Volt.PSx (addr. 0XX.241) ASC: tClose enable syn.PSx (addr. 0XX.240)

have been replaced by fixed minimum times of 100 ms.

These measured event values have been added to the Automatic Synchronism Check: ASC: Voltage Vref (addr. 004.087) ASC: Volt. sel. meas.loop (addr. 004.088)

The measuring range of the measured event value ASC: Volt. magnit. diff. (addr. 004.091) has been changed from 0.000 3.000 Vnom to 3.000 3.000 Vnom.

LIMIT Bug fixing: If the temperature measurand T was set to "not measured" the stages T< and T<< in the limit value monitoring function would start.


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 F-7

Version Changes

P139-304-405/406/407-605 Release: 28.11.2003

Hardware A new communication module A, providing the InterMiCOM protective interface COMM3, can now be fitted in slot 3 instead of the transient ground fault detection module N.

A new temperature p/c board (RTD module) can now be fitted in slot 3, instead of the transient ground fault detection module N (TGFD module).

As an alternative to the conventional transformer modules for analog input signals there is now a new CT/VT-board with NCIT available. Details are available on request. See chapter 2, section "Connecting NCITs to Inputs on the CT/VT-board with NCIT".

Binary signal inputs with a higher switching threshold are now available. Installation is only recommended if the application specifically requires such binary signal inputs.

Diagram The new connection diagrams include the InterMiCOM communication interface (function group COMM3), the temperature p/c board (RTD module) and the CT/VT-board with NCIT.

! P139.405 (for 40 TE case, with pin-terminal connection)

! P139.406 (for 40 TE case, transformer module: with ring-terminal connection; other modules: with pin-terminal connection)

! P139.407 (for 84 TE case, with ring-terminal connection)

LOC Customized binary signal panels can now be created. A customized Bay Panel can be sub-divided into up to eight images.

The selection table for the Operation Panel was extended.

The signals M037-M040 can now be configured as image variables.

Bug fixing: When, after a switchgear unit had been selected locally, local control was switched over to remote control, the selection of local switching actions could continue to be made up to the termination of the reset time.

COMM1 Bug fixing concerning various communication protocols:

! DNP3: Multiple telegrams are prevented.

! The protocol per IEC60850-5-101 incorrectly transmitted negative operating values.

! IEC-60870-5-101: In the data model there was an incorrect selection for parameter COMM1: Time tag length (addr. 003.198). Furthermore 3 Bytes were used irrespective of the setting.


F-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Version Changes

COMM1(2) Bug fixing concerning the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol: ! For the reclose commands of high-speed and time-delayed reclosing

(Function Type 80h, Information nos. 80h and 81h), the status changes 'On' to 'Off' were signaled spontaneously and were transmitted as part of the response to a general scan.

The fault location FT_DA: Fault react., prim. (add. 004.029) (Function Type 80h, Information no. 49h), will no longer be sent spontaneously, if its value is 'Not measured.

With the fault values transmission the scaling factor for the primary value of channel VNG was corrected by a factor of 1/√3.

COMM3 New function group: COMM3 (InterMiCOM protection interface) permits end-end channel-aided schemes to be configured, without the need of discrete carrier equipment.

INP Further reset commands were added to the function assignment of binary signal inputs.

MEASO Scaling of the BCD coded output of measurands now allows the setting of an output values range. This feature is required if signed event measurands are assigned to the BCD output (like fault location or short-circuit reactance,...).

MAIN Sensitivity for the setting of this parameter was increased to 0.01 s: MAIN: Suppress start. sig. (addr. 017.054)

The determination of the faulty phase during a ground fault in Petersen coil compensated power systems is improved to avoid incorrect signaling at the end of the ground fault.

These measured operating values have been added: MAIN: Appar. power S prim. (addr. 005.025) and MAIN: Appar. power S p.u. (addr. 005.026).

The delay time for the Running Time Monitoring of manually operated switchgear can now be set: MAIN: Delay Man.Op.Superv (addr. 221.079)

Bug fixing: All energy counters were reset by a general starting (GS).

Bug fixing: The values set for the primary transformer voltages were reset to their default values when a warm restart of the device occurred.

Bug fixing: If a device or switchgear designation was omitted in a customized panel then the device went out of order when such a panel was selected.

MAIN ARC ASC PSIG

The stored status is no longer reset with a warm restart of the device, when specific functions are enabled or disabled through a binary signal input.


P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 F-9

Version Changes

FT_DA The determination of measured fault values during short fault times is improved.

Bug fixing: Fault locations of numerical values >655.35% were falsely displayed as small values.

Bug fixing: When a residual current starting occurs without a phase current starting all measured fault values dependent on a measurement loop are set to 'Not measured'.

FT_RC

Direction signaling for the short-circuit direction determination function was added to the selection table for the fault recording trigger: FT_RC: Fct. assig. Trigger (addr. 003.085)

DTOC Three negative-sequence current stages were added to the definite-time overcurrent protection.

IDMT Bug fixing: The trip signals from the residual current stage and the negative-sequence current stage were not reset with the release of starting.

ARC Bug fixing: The HSR & TDR counters could only be acknowledged/cleared by a cold restart.

ASC Bug fixing: With a close request the counter ASC: No. GF (curr. meas) (addr. 009.003) was increment by a count of 8 instead of 1.

Bug fixing: When a test close request was issued in the operating mode "synchronism-checked" a chattering of the ASC enable signal could occur.

TGFD The setting range of TGFD: IN,p> (addr. 016.042) is extended down to 0.03 Inom.

The pick-up delay of the measuring circuit monitoring signal SFMON: TGFD mon. triggered (addr. 093.094) is now increased from 5 s to 65 s.

P<> The power directional protection now includes overload stages for active and reactive power.

The starting signals from the power directional protection stages now feature direction dependency.

The setting range for the parameter P<>: Release delay Q> PS1 (addr. 017172) is now extended to max. 100.00 s.

MCMON The default setting for parameter MCMO: FF,Vref enabled USER. (addr. 013.014) was changed from 'Yes' to 'No'.

LIMIT Reference voltage monitoring from the fifth VT input was added to the Limit Value Monitoring function.


F-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Version Changes

LOGIC Bug fixing: The time dependent logic outputs - LOGIC: Output x (t) (addr. 042.033) (with x=1 to 32) - are reset for a short period during parameter subset selection.

DEVx (x=1 to 10)

Bug fixing: When the additions to the protocol IEC 60870-5-103 were applied, the return signal identification was missing in the acknowledgment of commands to switchgear.

CMD_1 Single commands, created with the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1, can now also be configured to output relays on the output module X (6xO) in slot 10 (with 40 TE cases) or slot 18 (with 84 TE cases).

SIG_1 Bug fixing: A concurrent use of signals M001 and M033 was not possible.

Bug fixing: The wrong selection table for communication in the data model was assigned to the signal SIG_1: Logic signal S010 (addr. 226.077).

SFMON To prevent the risk of contention problems because of the simultaneous disruption of the supply voltage and the auxiliary voltage for the binary signal inputs m.c.b. trip signals are now delayed internally for 300 ms.

Bug fixing: Sporadic triggering of the internal monitoring of the 15 V and 24 V voltages without a fault in the power supply module being present was eliminated.

AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

Pub

licat

ion:

P13

9/E

N M

/B33

(AFS

V.1

2.09

450

D)

VO

L. 2

/2

MiCOM P139 Feeder Management and Bay

Control Version: P139 -304 -405/406/407 -605 P139 -306 -408/409/410 -611

Upgrade Documentation

P139/EN AD/A77 (AFSV.12.09690.D)

P139, Upgrade Documentation: -605 to -611

P139, Upgrade Documentation: -605 to -611

P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-3

Contents

1 Overview U-5

2 Functional Details U-12 2.1 Communication interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC) U-12

2.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE) U-18

2.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE) U-32

2.4 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) U-43

2.5 Short-circuit direction determination (Function Group SCDD) U-44

2.6 Thermal overload protection (Function Group THERM) U-46

2.7 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF) U-58

2.8 Circuit Breaker Monitoring

(Function Group CBM) U-68

P139, Upgrade Documentation: -605 to -611 (continued)

U-4 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

In the new version of the P139 several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been included. These are described with reference to the Technical Manual listed below.

References Released Version Documentation

28.11.2003 P139-304-405/406/407-605 Technical Manual AFSV.12.09450/1 EN


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-5

1 Overview

Version Changes

This is a preliminary IEC 61850 version which is project-specific and only available on request!

P139-305-408/409/410-610 Release: 20.05.2005

Hardware The new Ethernet module for communication per IEC 61850 is now available and may be fitted to slot 2 as an alternative to communication module A.

Diagram The updated connection diagrams now include the Ethernet module communication interface.

P139.408 (for 40 TE case, with pin-terminal connection)

P139.409 (for 40 TE case, transformer module: with ring-terminal connection; other modules: with pin-terminal connection)

P139.410 (for 84 TE case, with ring-terminal connection)

Software

LOC Addition of the event counter to the selection for the Fault Panel ASC: No. RC af t . man.c los (004 009).

Addition of the measured value to the selection for the Operation Panel. MEASI: Scaled value IDC,l in (004 180).

COMM1 The selection of register assignments for signals in the MODBUS protocol has been extended with the signal SCDD: Faul t P backward (036 019).

Time stamping of status signals from external devices has been adapted to the DNP3 protocol.

Bug fixing: A change of a communication parameter will no longer lead to a sporadic warm restart of the device, when the Courier protocol is used.

COMM3 Bug fixing: After a warm restart with COMM3 activated, the entry at SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 (093 143) will now only occur if there actually is such a hardware error.

IEC Initial implementation of the IEC 61850 communication protocol.

GSSE In conjunction with the IEC 61850 communication protocol a communication procedure has been implemented that is compatible with previous UCA2 GOOSE for the exchange of binary information within an Ethernet network section.


U-6 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Version Changes

SFMON A number of device bugs previously lead to a blocking with the second entry to the monitoring signal memory (i.e. if the recurring fault was already stored in the monitoring signal memory – see Chapter 10 in the Technical Manual). This reaction was modified in such a manner that device blocking will only occur if a renewed appearance of the same device fault lies within a set "memory retention time" SFMON: Mon.s ig. retent ion (021 018). This makes it possible to tolerate sporadic faults, resulting from control actions, without having to clear the monitoring signal memory in the interim. The significance of the time stamp was modified to accommodate this new feature. The time stamp now represents the last appearance of the fault.

OUTP/LED Addition of the signal ASC: Close request (034 018) to the selection of freely configurable LED indicators and output relays.

FT_RC The duration of the disturbance record is limited to 1 minute so as to avoid a record of an endless disturbance.

The signal ARC: Blocking EXT (036.050) is now stored in the fault recording (previously only the resulting signal ARC: Blocked (004.069) was recorded).

MEASI Open-circuit monitoring of the 20 mA input and the "PT 100" input has been improved.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-7

Version Changes

MAIN Parameters from the MAIN function, which could previously only be set in the branch "General Functions" of the menu tree, have been transferred to the parameter subsets.

MAIN: Neutr .pt . t reat . PSx MAIN: Hld t ime dyn.par. PSx MAIN: Bl . t im.st . IN,neg PSx MAIN: Gen. star t . mode PSx MAIN: Op. rush restr . PSx MAIN: Rush I(2fn) / I ( fn) PSx MAIN: I> l i f t rush restr PSx MAIN: Suppr.star t .s ig. PSx MAIN: tGS PSx

With this improvement it is now possible to consider operational changes by selecting the appropriate parameter subset.

The parameter MAIN: Neutral-point t reat. (010 048) used only in conjunction with the ASC is now visible if the ASC function has been configured. Furthermore the selections at various neutral point treatments that occur by this parameter have now been reduced to a selection relevant to the application.

The primary source for synchronizing the date and time can now be selected. Available are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. A backup source may additionally be selected.

MAIN: Pr im.Source TimeSync (103 210) MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync (103 211)

For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time tag for the signal is to be issued after debouncing (or when the first pulse edge is detected). The setting MAIN: TimeTagAfterDebounce (221 083) is provided for this purpose.

Bug fixing: The enabling or disabling of the ground protection via a binary signal input was incorrectly inverted.

PSIG Bug fixing: The enabling or disabling of the protective signaling via a binary signal input was incorrectly inverted.

ARC Bug fixing: The enabling or disabling of the ARC function via a binary signal input was incorrectly inverted.The DTOC negative-sequence current stage started the ARC by triggering the ARC trip time of the IDMT negative-sequence current stage.

ASC Selecting the CB assignment to an external device has been adapted to the maximum possible number of external devices.

Bug fixing: The enabling or disabling of the ASC function via a binary signal input was incorrectly inverted.


U-8 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Version Changes

GFDSS The setting parameters for the function GFDSS are now included in the parameter subsets and can be changed, according to operating conditions, by selecting the appropriate parameter subset. It is also possible to individually enable this function in each parameter subset.

Processing of the function GFDSS now occurs with a higher priority in order to obtain reduced reaction times with less fluctuation. This is a response to the increased application of ground fault direction signaling as a tripping condition.

Bug fixing: The cause for faulty or unstable directional decisions with the operate delay tVNG> set below 60 ms has been removed.

Bug fixing: The operate delays LS and BS are now accurate, even with set values > 65 s.

TGFD The setting parameters for the function TGFD are now included in the parameter subsets and can be changed, according to operating conditions, by selecting the appropriate parameter subset. It is also possible to individually enable this function in each parameter subset.

THERM Bug fixing: In the event of an open circuit in the 20 mA current loop when using this to measure temperatures there was no automatic activation of the corresponding backup temperature sensor.

P<> The setting range for the following parameters was extended from max. 0.5 Snom to now max. 1.5 Snom:

P<>: P> (017 120) P<>: P>> (017 140) P<>: Q> (017 160) P<>: Q>> (017 180)

Bug fixing: When setting a high operate value as well as a high disengaging ratio for the P< or Q< stages an internal overflow was possible that led to a lower disengaging ratio than that which had been set.

Bug fixing: When the stage P< (P<<, Q< or Q<<) was triggered the signal P<>: Faul t P< (P<<, Q< or Q<<) was issued even though the operate delay for the stage was blocked.

CBM Function circuit breaker monitoring (CBM) has been added.

LIMIT Parameter cells and signals related to Vref are only visible when the device has been fitted with a fifth VT to measure Vref .


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-9

Version Changes

This is a preliminary IEC 61850 version which is project-specific and only available on request!

P139-305-408/409/410-610-704



Software

IEC With regard to IEC 61850-8-1 the data type for the quality of measured values and signals has been changed from 14 bit to 13 bit.

P139-306-408/409/410-611 Release: 07.11.2005

Hardware Further variants with binary signal inputs with a higher operate threshold are now available. This makes the following selections available:

>18 V (standard variant) (Without order extension No.) >90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125 ... 150 V) (Order ext. No. 461) >155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220 ... 250 V) (Order ext. No. 462) >73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V) (Order ext. No. 463)

>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) (Order ext. No. 464)

Standard variant recommended if higher pickup threshold is not specifically required by application.


Software

LOC Extensive expansion of the parameter selection LOC: Assignment read key (080 110). Instead of selecting only one assigned protocol by pressing the READ key there are now up to 16 different addresses assigned which can be selected by pressing the READ key more than once in succession (menu jump function).

COMM1/ COMM2

With the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol, the selection of measured operating values has been extended for the cyclic ILS telegram.

IEC General expansion of the Logical Nodes according to the IEC 61850 data model.

For access by the support software S1 via Ethernet the function "Setting by Tunneling" has been implemented.

GOOSE For the exchange of binary information in an Ethernet network section the IEC 61850 communication procedure (IEC-GOOSE) has been implemented.

SFMON Change of the English signal designation (relevant only when English designation text is used) for this signal:

SFMON: CB faul ty EXT (098 072)


U-10 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Version Changes

MAIN The following per unit measured operating values have been added:

MAIN: Current Ipos p.u. (009 016) MAIN: Current Ineg p.u. (009 015) MAIN: Vol tage Vpos p.u. (009 018) MAIN: Vol tage Vneg p.u. (009 017) MAIN: Frequency f p.u. (004 070) MAIN: Angle VPG/IN p.u. (005 072) MAIN: Load angle phi A p.u (005 073) MAIN: Load angle phi B p.u (005 074) MAIN: Load angle phi C p.u (005 075) MAIN: Angle phi N p.u. (005 076)

The parameter MAIN: Rotary f ie ld (010 049) was renamed to MAIN: Phase sequ. (010 049). In addition the parameter selection for clockwise and anticlockwise was also changed to A-B-C and A-C-B.

Change of the English signal designation (relevant only when English designation text is used) for the following parameter:

MAIN: Pr im.Source TimeSync (103 210) MAIN: BackupSourceTimeSync (103 211)

FT_RC The signal FT_RC: Record.tr ig act ive (002 002) has been implemented, which shows that a fault-recording trigger is present.

FT_DA Bug fixing: When a fault location is outside the measuring range it could happen that the fault location was measured as too small by the fault measurand FT_DA: Faul t locat. percent (004 027)

DTOC A fourth overcurrent stage (residual current stage) IN>>>> with an extended setting range has been integrated. Because of its extended setting range this stage always uses the residual current calculated from the three phase currents.

IDMT2 A second inverse-time overcurrent protection function has been added.

SCDD A voltage memory has been added to the short-circuit direction determination function. In general SCDD will operate as previously with the non-faulted voltages. Now the device offers a voltage memory from which the SCDD function can obtain necessary voltage information for direction determination when 3-pole faults with a large 3-phase voltage drop have occurred.

MP The motor protection function has been extended by these per unit measured operating values:

MP: Therm. repl . MP p.u. (005 071) MP: St-ups st . perm.p.u. (005 086)


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-11

Version Changes

THERM The parameters THERM: Bl . f . CTA faul t PSx have been replaced by the parameters with an extended setting range THERM: Funct. f .CTA fai l .PSx. In order to obtain improved visibility control of the parameters for the relative and absolute replica the previous parameter THERM: Operat ing mode (022 063) has been replaced by:

THERM: Relat ive repl ica (022 064) THERM: Absolute repl ica (022 065)

It should be remembered that an explicit selection – relative or absolute replica – for the thermal overload protection must be carried out. If no such explicit selection – relative or absolute replica – is carried out the thermal overload protection will be blocked and the warning signal THERM: Sett ing error ,b lock. (039 110) is issued.

These parameters are now available to set the over temperature and the warning temperature in the absolute replica:

THERM: O/T f.Iref pers. PSx THERM: Warning temp. PSx

The following signals have been added to the thermal overload protection:

THERM: Reclosure blocked (039 024) THERM: Not ready (040 035)

V<> The over-/undervoltage function may now be optionally operated with an enable threshold based on the minimum current monitor for the undervoltage stages (V<, V<<, Vpos<, Vpos<<). The undervoltage stages are blocked if during active monitoring the set threshold of at least one phase is not exceeded by the phase currents. There are two new setting parameters to activate the operating mode for minimum current monitoring and to set the enable threshold:

V<>: Op. mode V< mon. PSx V<>:I enable V< PSx

f<> Bug fixing: The origin for imprecise frequency measurements, when 6 cycles were selected for the evaluation time, has now been eliminated.

CBF The complete revision of the circuit breaker failure protection function now includes a current breaking-off criterion.

The previous signal CBF: CB fa i lure (036 017) has been replaced by the following signals:

CBF: Tr ip s ignal t1 (038 215) CBF: Tr ip s ignal t2 (038 219)

CBM Bug fixing: An incorrect internally active wear characteristic lead to an incorrect calculation of the number of CB operations remaining, when at least one of these parameters was set to blocked: CBM: Med. curr . I t r ip,CB (022 014) or CBM: Perm. CB op. Imed,CB (022 015)


U-12 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

2 Functional Details

2.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)

As a further option the P139 includes an interface protocol according to the Ethernet based communication standard IEC 61850.

IEC 61850 The IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard. The main target of the IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation.

Now this new communication standard IEC 61850 has created an open and common basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.

For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal images.

The following documentation with the description of the IEC 61850 data model, used with the P139, is available:

IDC file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available from the device, that are to be imported into the system configurator.

PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:

PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available services.

MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available object types.

ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with the device data model as per IEC 61850.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-13

Ethernet Module The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection which of the two interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter I E C : E t h e r n e t m e d i a . There are two ordering variants available for the fiber optic interface: the ST connector for 10 Mbit/s and 850 nm and the SC connector for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm (a third variant ST connector for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm is in preparation). The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s. The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RJ485 interface for remote access with the operating program MiCOM S1 (function group COMM2).

Notes: The P139 may only be equipped with the optional Ethernet module as an alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the Ethernet based communication protocol IEC 61850 is only available as an alternative to function group COMM1.

The Ethernet module can only be applied in conjunction with the processor module P (included in current hardware version) with the item number 9650 135 or other processor modules available in the near future. When upgrading older P139 hardware versions with an Ethernet module, which is technically possible, it must be kept in mind that such units are usually equipped with the processor module P with the item number 0337 875. This processor module P does not support the Ethernet module and therefore the communication protocol IEC 61850 will not function. If such an upgrade is carried out the processor module P must be exchanged. The processor module item number can be checked by reading the device identification setting at D V I C E : M o d u l e v a r . s l o t 1 .

Activating and Enabling The function group IEC can be activated by setting the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n g r o u p I E C . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of IEC, all data points associated with this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting I E C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R .

The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e .

Client Log-on Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is common with other protocols. Instead server or client functionalities, as defined in the 'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the devices. A 'server' is always that device which provides information to other devices. A client may log-on to this server so as to receive information, for instance 'reports'. In a network a server can supply any number of clients with spontaneous or cyclic information.

In its function as server the P139 can supply up to 16 clients with information.


U-14 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Clock Synchronization With IEC 61850 clock synchronization occurs via the SNTP protocol, defined as standard for Ethernet. Here the P139 functions as SNTP client.

For clock synchronization one can select between the operating modes Broadcast from SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all devices in the network, and in the second operating mode the P139 requests the device specific time signal during a settable cycle.

Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units

Control of switchgear units by the P139 can be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the device. Only one control command is executed at a time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the execution of such a command are rejected. To control external devices the following operating modes can be set at I E C : D E V c o n t r o l m o d e l :

Status only

Direct control with normal security

Direct control with enhanced security

SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security

When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected by the client before the control command is issued. Because of this selection the switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by other clients are rejected. If after a selection no control command is issued by the client the P139 resets this selection after 2 minutes have elapsed.

The switchgear units’ contact positions signaled to the clients are made with the Report Control Blocks of the switchgear units.

Fault Transmission Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer".

Transmission of "Goose Messages"

The so-called "Goose Message" is a particular form of data transmission. Whereas normal server-client-services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level, the "Goose Message" is transmitted directly at the Ethernet level with a high transmission priority. Furthermore these "Goose Messages" can be received by all participants in the respective sub-network, independent of their server or client function. In IEC 61850 "Goose Messages" are applied for the accelerated transmission of information between two or more devices. Application fields are, for example, a reverse interlocking, a transfer trip or a decentralized substation interlock. In future the "Goose Message" will therefore replace a wired or serial protective interface.

According to IEC 61850 there are two types of "Goose Messages", the GSSE and the IEC-GOOSE. The GSSE is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. However the IEC-GOOSE enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values or even analog measured values. But this will require more extensive configuration with the help of the data model from the field unit situated on the opposite side. With the IEC-GOOSE the P139 at this time supports sending and receiving of binary information or two-pole external device states.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-15

Communication with the Operating Program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet Interface

Direct access by the operating program MiCOM S1 via the Ethernet interface on the device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is only supported by the associated operating program MiCOM S1 (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client communication and "Goose Messages". Available are all the familiar functions offered by the operating program MiCOM S1 such as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.

The function group IEC presents the following parameters, measured values and signals:

Configuration Parameters

IEC: Function group IEC 056 059

Canceling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.

IEC: General enable USER 104 000

Enabling and disabling function group IEC.

IEC: Enable configuration 104 058

This parameter can only be sent individually. In order to maintain consistency of all parameters in the function groups IEC, GSSE and GOOSE, they are only enabled mutually by this parameter. After this command is sent to the device, the actual status of the previously changed parameter setting of the three function groups is enabled in the communication data model of the connected device. This function is carried out automatically with the off-line/on-line switching of the device.

IEC: Inactivity timer 104 050

Additional communication monitor at Ethernet. Should a logged-on client issue no further request message after this time period has elapsed, this client will automatically be logged-off, i.e. no further reports will be issued to him. To re-establish communication the client is required to perform a new log-on procedure with the device (IED).

IEC: Deadband value 104 051

Setting to calculate the filter value for all measured value Report Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy. Should a change occur in one of the measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. For each measured value the filter value is calculated according to this formula: Step size measured value • Setting I E C : D e a d b a n d v a l u e

IEC: Ethernet media 104 056

Selecting the physical communication channel from either wired (RJ45) or optical fiber (ST/SC connector depending on ordering option)

IEC: Delta t (energy) 104 060

Cycle time to send energy value by Report Control Block (RCB). No RCB transmission with setting to blocked!


U-16 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

IEC: IP address 104 001

IP address for the device (IED has server function).

IEC: Subnet mask 104 005

The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.

IEC: Number of routes 104 010

Number of network routes, that can be contacted outside of the sub-network, between the device (IED) and a client or server, communicating with this device, and situated in an exterior target network.

Such a configuration is required only then when this device must contact an external client/server direct without having its own network router to convert an IP address.

Addressing of the router and the target network however are always necessary.

Up to four such external target networks can be contacted.

IEC: Router address 1 104 011

IP address of network router # 1.

IEC: Target network 1 104 015

IP address of target network # 1.













IEC: SNTP operating mode 104 200 Operating mode for the time synchronization telegram. When set to

Broadcast synchronization occurs cyclically with the clock server transmitting a broadcast signal and, when set to Request from Server each device (IED has client function) individually requests a synchronization signal after its own cycle time.

IEC: SNTP poll cycle time 104 201 Device (IED) poll cycle time for time synchronization when operating mode

is set to Request from Server.

IEC: SNTP server IP addr. 104 202 IP address of the synchronizing clock server.

IEC: Diff. local time 104 206 Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation

(IED).


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-17

IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time 104 207 Time difference when changing to daylight saving time.

IEC: IED name 104 057 Name of the device (IED has server function). This device name serves as

device identification in the IEC 61850 system, it is included in the Logical Device Name in the IEC data model and must therefore be unambiguous. All devices logged-on to the network should have non-recurring IED names.

IEC: DEV control model 221 081 Setting of which control model is to be used to control all external devices.

Suggested setting when performing switching operations at maximum safety is SBO enh. Security (SBO = Select-Before-Operate).

Function Parameters, General Functions

COUNT: IEC 61850 pulsQty 221 096 Setting the scaling factor to transmit the counter value via IEC 61850.

According to the standard the resulting value is calculated as: Value transmitted = actual value * pulsQty (see IEC 61850: Value = actVal * pulsQty).

Measured Operating Data

IEC: MAC address 104 061 MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This

address is introduced during manufacture and can only be read.

Logic State Signals

IEC: Comm. link faulty 105 180 Display when an Ethernet module has not initiated properly, i.e. if the MAC

address is missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting!

IEC: Control reservation 221 082 Display if a client has made a reservation to control an external device

("select" for control by control mode "select before operate").


U-18 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

2.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)

For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic devices) in a local network, the P139 provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the standard IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.

"Goose Messages" are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. "Goose Messages" therefore remain in the local network to which the device is logged-on.

Activating and Enabling The function group GOOSE can be activated by setting the parameter G O O S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G O O S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GOOSE, all data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting G O O S E : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R .

The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition the function group IEC must be configured and enabled.

Sending GOOSE With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals and up to 10 two-pole states from the maximum of 10 possible external devices associated to the P139 can be sent. Selection of binary state signals is made by setting GOOSE: O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). The up to 10 two-pole states of the external devices are a fixed part of GOOSE for which there is no necessity to set parameters. The assignment of data object indexes to logic state signals is made in the range from 1 to 32 according to the assignment to GOOSE outputs. The two-pole state signals from external devices 1 to 10 receive a permanent assignment of data object indexes in ascending order from 33 to 42.

GOOSE is automatically sent with each new state change of a configured binary state signal or an external device. There are numerous send repetitions in fixed ascending time periods (10 ms, 20 ms, 50 ms, 100 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms). If after 2 seconds there is no further state change apparent, GOOSE is then sent cyclically at 2-second intervals.

In order to have unambiguous identification of GOOSE sent, characteristics such as the Goose ID number, MAC address, application ID and VLAN identifier must be entered through parameter settings. Further characteristics are the 'Dataset Configuration Revision' with the fixed value "100" as well as the 'Dataset Reference', which is made up of the IED name (setting in function group IEC) and the fixed string "System/LLNO$GooseST".


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-19

GOOSE DataSet: LLN0$GooseST

Goose ID: "This IED"

ServernameSYSTEM/GosGGI01/Out1/stVal

Multicast MAC address: 01-0C-CD-01-00-00

VLAN Identifier: 0

GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig.

ServernameCONTROL/CSWI1/Pos/stVal

…

… …

…GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig.

GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig.

DEV01: Control state



19Z6101B _EN





Identification:

Data range:

Application ID: 12288

DataSet Cfg. Revision: 100

DataSet Ref. : "This IED System/LLNO"

U-1 Basic structure of sent GOOSE

Receiving GOOSE With GOOSE up to 16 logic binary state signals and the two-pole contact position signals from up to 16 external devices can be received. Configuration of the logic state signals received (G O O S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 16)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs). Contact position signals received from external devices are listed in the selection table for interlocking equations of the function group ILOCK, which are available to design a decentralized substation interlock.

For each state or contact position signal to be received from an external device the "Goose Message" must be selected that includes the information wanted by setting the Goose ID, the Application ID and the 'Dataset Reference'. With the further setting of the data object index and the data attribute index through parameters, the selection of the information wanted from the chosen GOOSE will occur. The device will not evaluate the identification features VLAN identifier and ‘Dataset Configuration Revision’ that are also included in the GOOSE received.

Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration of


U-20 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

validity has elapsed without having received this GOOSE again (i.e. because of a fault in communication), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective default value GOOSE: Input n defaul t and GOOSE: Ext .Dev n defaul t (n = 1 to 16).

The function group GOOSE presents the following parameters, measured values and signals:

Configuration Parameters GOOSE: Function group GOOSE 056 068

Canceling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are only then active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if the parameters of this function group have been activated through the parameter I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by switching the device off-line/on-line.

GOOSE: General enable USER 106 001

Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.

GOOSE: Goose ID 106 002

Goose ID being sent by this device (IED). GOOSE includes a Dataset with 32 binary and configurable virtual outputs and 10 two-pole states to the maximum of 10 monitored external devices

GOOSE: Multic. MAC address 106 003

Multicast MAC address to provide identification of GOOSE to the receiving clients (IED). The default MAC address entered is suggested as a standard according to IEC 61850. The multicast MAC address entered in GOOSE may be modified so as to increase transmission security or to reduce the number of "GOOSE Messages" to be read by receiving clients (IED).

GOOSE: Application ID 106 004

Application ID of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED).

GOOSE: VLAN Identifier 106 006

VLAN identifier of GOOSE being sent by this device (IED). The VLAN identifier makes it possible to have switches in the network filter messages, if the switches support such a function. Because so-called multicast MAC addresses are applied, switches are unable to filter messages in the network if they do not include a VLAN identifier.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-21

GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 106 011
































Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE outputs. The signal configured here is sent with the permanently configured Dataset of GOOSE.


U-22 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

GOOSE: Input 1 Goose ID 107 001
















Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Goose ID 108 001
















Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. Virtual GOOSE inputs can be linked with interlocking equations of assigned external devices.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-23

GOOSE: Input 1 Applic. ID 107 000
















Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Applic. ID 108 000
















Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.

GOOSE: Input 1 DataSet Ref 107 002
















U-24 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611


'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device (IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first 20 characters are to be entered.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DatasetRef 108 002
















'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device (IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first 20 characters are to be entered.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-25

GOOSE: Input 1 DataObj Ind 107 003
















Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data object index indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DatasetInd 108 003
















Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A data object index indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.


U-26 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

GOOSE: Input 1 DatAttr Ind 107 004
















Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual binary GOOSE input. A data attribute index indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DatasetEle 108 004
















Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A data attribute index indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-27

GOOSE: Input 1 default 107 005
















Default for the virtual binary GOOSE input. The state of a virtual binary GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 default 108 005
















Default for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. The state of a virtual two-pole GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.


U-28 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 006
















Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was received with the Dataset of GOOSE

Measured Operating Data GOOSE: Dataset Cfg.Revision 106 005

Display of the 'Dataset Configuration Revision' value of GOOSE, which is sent from this device (IED).


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-29

Physical State Signals GOOSE: Output 1 state 106 010

GOOSE: Output 2 state 106 012






























GOOSE: Output 32 state 106 072 Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.

GOOSE: Input 1 state 106 200















GOOSE: Input 16 state 106 215 Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.


U-30 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Logic State Signals GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position 109 000

GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 position 109 005














GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 position 109 075 State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an

external device.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open 109 001















GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 open 109 076 Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the

state of an external device.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed 109 002
















P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-31

GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 closed 109 077 Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the

state of an external device.

GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos 109 003















GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 interm.pos 109 078 Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,

representing the state of an external device.

GOOSE: IED link faulty 107 250 Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE

sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period at which the next state signal must be received.


U-32 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

2.3 Generic Substation State Event (Function Group GSSE)

For high-speed exchange of information between individual IEDs (intelligent electronic devices) in a local network, the P139 provides, as an additional functionality, the function group GSSE (UCA2.0-GOOSE) as defined in the standard IEC 61850. GSSE features high-speed and secure transmission of logic binary state signals such as reverse interlocking, trip commands, blocking, enabling and other signals.

Activating and Enabling The Function Group GSSE can be activated by setting the parameter G S S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G S S E . This parameter is only visible if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After activation of GSSE, all data points associated to this function group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible. The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting G S S E : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R .

The parameter settings for function groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE in the device are not automatically activated. An activation occurs either when the command I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n is executed or automatically when the device is switched online with M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e . In addition the function group IEC must be configured and enabled.

Sending GSSE With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be sent. Selection of state signals is made by setting GSSE: O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). Each state signal selected is to be assigned to a bit pair in GSSE (GSSE: Output n bi t pair (n = 1 to 32)), which will transmit this state signal.

GSSE is automatically sent with each state change of a selected state signal. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter G S S E : M i n . c y c l e . The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the parameter G S S E : I n c r e m e n t . Should no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed (G S S E : M a x . c y c l e ) , then GSSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the max. cycle time.

In order to have unambiguous identification of a GSSE sent, the IED name is used which was set in function group IEC.

Receiving GSSE With GSSE up to 32 logic binary state signals can be received. Configuration of the logic binary state signals received (G S S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).

For each state signal to be received, the GSSE message, which will include the information wanted, must be selected by setting the IED name (G S S E : I E D n a m e ). Selection of information wanted from the selected GSSE will occur by setting the bit pair (G S S E : b i t p a i r ) .

Each GSSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GSSE repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this GSSE again (i.e. because of a fault in communication), the signals received will automatically be set to their respective default value ( G S S E : I n p u t n d e f a u l t (n = 1 to 32)).


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-33

The Function Group GSSE presents the following parameters and signals:

Configuration Parameters GSSE: Function group GSSE 056 060

Canceling function group GSSC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden. The parameters of this function group are only then active if function group IEC has been configured and is activated, and if the parameters of this function group have been activated through the parameter I E C : E n a b l e c o n f i g u r a t i o n or by switching the device off-line/on-line.

GSSE: General enable USER 104 049

Enabling and disabling function group GSSE.

GSSE: Min. cycle 104 052

Minimum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in ms. The repetition cycle time for a GSSE message is calculated, according to a standard, with this formula:

Repetition cycle time = Min. cycle + (1 + (increment/1000))N-1 [ms]

The repetitions counter N will be restarted at count 1 after each state change of a GSSE bit pair.

GSSE: Max. cycle 104 053

Maximum value for the GSSE repetition cycle time in s. For the formula to calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle. Should the calculated value for the repetition cycle time be equal to or greater than the set max. value then the GSSE message will be sent repeatedly at the set max. value time.

GSSE: Increment 104 054

Increment for the GSSE repetition cycle. For the formula to calculate the repetition cycle time see Min. cycle.

GSSE: Operating mode 104 055

In the operating mode Broadcast all GSSE, independent of their MAC address (network hardware characteristic), are always read and processed. In the operating mode Promiscuous and after all GSSE sending devices have logged-on, only messages with the MAC addresses of IEDs, that have logged-on successfully, are read and processed.


U-34 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

GSSE: Output 1 bit pair 104 101
































Setting with which GSSE bit pair the configured binary signal of the virtual GSSE outputs is to be transmitted. A GSSE is always transmitted consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are used by this device (IED) during a send operation.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-35

GSSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 104 102
































Function assignment of a binary logical status signal to the virtual GSSE outputs. The signal configured here is sent through the GSSE bit pair as configured above.


U-36 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

GSSE: Input 1 bit pair 105 001
































Setting which GSSE bit pair is assigned to which virtual GSSE input. A GSSE is always received consisting of a fixed number of 96 bit pairs, of which a maximum of 32 are processed by this device (IED).


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-37

GSSE: Input 1 IED name 105 002
































IED name for the virtual GSSE input used to identify a GSSE received.


U-38 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

GSSE: Input 1 default 105 003
































Default for the virtual binary GSSE input. The state of a virtual two-pole GSSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-39

GSSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 105 004
































Function assignment of the virtual binary GSSE input to a binary logical state signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the state of the bit pair, as configured above, and which was received with GSSE


U-40 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Physical State Signals GSSE: Output 1 state 104 100

GSSE: Output 2 state 104 103































Display of the virtual binary GSSE output state.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-41

GSSE: Input 1 state 105 000
































Display of the virtual binary GSSE input state.

Logic State Signals GSSE: IED link faulty 105 181

Display if the continuously monitored communication link to a GSSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether. To each GSSE the GSSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GSSE will be carried out independent of a change of state. Thus the device monitors the time period at which the next state signal must be received.

Control and Testing GSSE: Reset counters 105 171

Command to reset monitoring counters as listed below.


U-42 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags L 105 160

Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 1 to 16).

GSSE: Enroll. IEDs flags H 105 161

Bar with state bits for all GSSE inputs, showing if the respective GSSE sending device has logged-on and is transmitting free of fault (input 17 to 32).

GSSE: Tx message counter 105 162

Shows the number of GSSE messages sent. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .

GSSE: Rx message counter 105 163

Shows the number of GSSE messages received. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .

GSSE: No. bin.state chang. 105 164

Number of state changes included in a GSSE sent. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .

GSSE: Tx last sequence 105 165

State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter sent with each GSSE.

GSSE: Tx last message 105 166

State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes sent with each GSSE.

GSSE: No. reject. messages 105 167

Number of telegram rejections having occurred because of non-plausible message content. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .

GSSE: IED view selection 105 170

Setting for which GSSE sending device the following statistics information is to be displayed.

GSSE: IED receiv. messages 105 172

Counter of the GSSE telegrams received by this IED. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .

GSSE: IED Rx last sequence 105 173

State of the continuous counter sequence for the message counter received with each GSSE.

GSSE: IED Rx last message 105 174

State of the continuous counter sequence for state changes received with each GSSE.

GSSE: IED missed messages 105 175

Number of missing GSSE messages (gaps in the continuous sequence numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .

GSSE: IED missed changes 105 176

Number of missing state changes (gaps in the continuous sequence numbering). This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .

GSSE: IED time-outs 105 177

Number of GSSE received after validity time period has elapsed. This counter is reset by G S S E : R e s e t c o u n t e r s .


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-43

2.4 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)

Depending on the type of internal fault detected the device will respond by trying to eliminate the problem with a warm restart. For further details see section Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) in Chapter 3 "Operation" and read about device behavior with problems in Chapter 10 "Troubleshooting". Whether or not this measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has not already been stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous fault. If it was already stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on the type of fault detected, the device will be blocked after the second warm restart. Previously this occurred independently of the time duration that had passed since the first monitoring signal was issued.

Monitoring signal memory The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the device if the monitoring signal memory has not been reset in the interim, for example, because the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out and clearing of the monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces was not enabled. A "memory retention time" has been introduced to defuse this problem. Now device blocking only occurs when the same internal device fault is detected twice during this time duration. Otherwise, the device will continue to operate normally after a warm restart. In the default setting this timer stage is blocked so that with a detected internal fault the device will operate the same as with the previous versions.

Address Description Range of Values Units

021 018 SFMON: Mon.sig. retention 0...240 / Blocked h

Monitoring signal memory time tag

Because of these changes the significance of the time tag for entries to the monitoring signal memory has been re-defined. The time when the device fault occurred first was previously recorded. As of version -610 the time when the device fault occurred last is now recorded.


U-44 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

2.5 Short-Circuit Direction Determination (Function Group SCDD)

Short-circuit direction determination using voltage memory (as of version -611)

The short-circuit direction determination (SCDD) function group is subdivided into two subsets.

Direction determination in a residual current system

For direction determination in a residual current system the measured residual current IN and the vector addition of the phase-ground voltages are applied. In this case voltage memory is not used.

Direction determination in a phase system

For direction determination in a phase system the SCDD function uses the fault-dependent short-circuit current and – in general – the phase-to-phase, unfaulted voltages (not involved in the short-circuit) assigned to the type of fault. This ensures that with single-pole and two-pole faults there is always sufficient voltage available for direction determination. This procedure can also be applied to three-pole faults with a phase-to-phase voltage > 200 mV.

Should a three-pole fault occur close to the point of measurement, there could be such a large 3-phase voltage drop, that direction determination on above basis is no longer possible. As of version -611 there is a voltage memory available for such fault occurrences from which the SCDD function can obtain the necessary voltage information for direction determination.

With a three-pole fault in the phase-current stage the measurement loop voltage (VABmeas) with the threshold set by the user at S C D D : O p e r . v a l . V m e m o r y P S x is compared with the threshold Vop.val. of the voltage memory.

Address Description Range of Values Units PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4

010 109 010 116 010 017 010 018 SCDD: Oper.val.Vmemory PSx 0.01 ... 0.15 ... 1.00 Vnom

If VABmeas < Vop.val. then the SCDD function will not use VABmeas but will revert to the voltage memory, if it has been enabled. The following signal is issued:

SCDD: Direct . using memory (038 047).

If the voltage memory has not been enabled (i.e. |Delta f| > 2.5 Hz) the SCDD function will check if VABmeas is sufficient for direction determination. Should the result with a disabled voltage memory be VABmeas > 200 mV the direction will be determined on the basis of VABmeas. The following signal is issued:

SCDD: Direct . using Vmeas (038 045)


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-45

If V12meas < 200 mV, a forward fault is detected if the voltage memory is disabled and if the pre-orientation is active (set under S C D D : T r i p b i a s ), otherwise the directional decision is blocked. The following signal is issued:

SCDD: Forw. w/o measurem. (038 044). These signals are additionally delivered to the following signals:

SCDD: Faul t P forward SCDD: Faul t P backward SCDD: Faul t P or G forwd. SCDD: Faul t P or G backw.


U-46 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

2.6 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM)

2.6.1 Functional Description

Using this function, thermal overload protection can be implemented. As of version –611 this function provides the following features:

Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection

Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled by setting parameters. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.

0

THERM: General enable

USER

[ 022 050 ]

1

0: No

1: Yes

0

THERM: Enable PSx

[ * ]

1

0: No

1: Yes

&

THERM: Enabled

[ 040 068 ]

PSS: PS x active

[ * ]

Parameter

set 1

set 2

set 3

set 4

THERM: Enable

PSx

001 118

001 119

001 120

001 121

PSS: PS x active

036 090

036 091

036 092

036 093

x

1

2

3

4

19Z6112A_EN

U-2 Enabling or disabling thermal overload protection


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-47

Readiness of thermal overload protection

Thermal overload protection will issue THERM: Not ready if one of the following conditions applies:

Thermal overload protection is disabled.

Thermal overload protection is blocked because of a fault in the coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition.

Thermal overload protection is blocked because of an incorrect setting.

The thermal replica is blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.

19Z6113A_EN

THERM: Enabled

[ 040 068 ]

&

>1THERM: Not ready

[ 040 035 ]

THERM: Block. by CTA error 305 200

>1THERM: Therm.repl.block EXT

[ 041 074 ]

THERM: Setting error,block.

[ 039 110 ]

U-3 Signal THERM: no t ready

Operating modes Two operating modes can be selected for thermal overload protection.

Relative replica

Absolute replica

Either operating mode can be enabled or disabled individually. Only one of the operating modes may be enabled for thermal overload protection. However, if both operating modes are enabled at the same time, the thermal overload protection is blocked and an error message is generated by the P139: THERM: Sett ing error ,b lock.


U-48 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Coolant temperature effect To permit coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition, one of the analog modules Y must be fitted, either the analog (I/O) module Y with a 20 mA current input and the "PT100" input or the temperature p/c board (the RTD module) with the temperature sensor inputs T1 to T9.

One of the 11 measuring inputs listed above is selected for the primary measurement of coolant temperature by setting the parameter T H E R M : Select meas. inputPSx.

In addition the parameter THERM: Sel . backup th. PSx is set to select which of these 11 measuring inputs is to be used as a backup to measure the coolant temperature when the primary measuring input has failed.

If the parameters T H E R M : Select meas. inputPSx or THERM: Sel . Backup th. PSx have been set incorrectly the thermal overload protection is blocked and an error message is generated by the P139: THERM: Sett ing error ,b lock.

An open measuring circuit, due to a broken wire, is determined by the measured value inputs (function group MEASI). This will result in the issuance of these signals:

M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . 2 0 m A i n p .

M E A S I : P T 1 0 0 o p e n c i r c u i t

M E A S I : T 1 o p e n c i r c . to M E A S I : T 9 o p e n c i r c .

The thermal model uses these signals as a criterion to determine a fault in the coolant temperature measurement. A fault at both measured value inputs selected will lead to the issuance of the signal T H E R M : C T A e r r o r .


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-49

The setting of T H E R M : F u n c t . f . C T A f a i l . P S x determines how the thermal overload protection is to continue functioning when the coolant temperature measurement has failed. The following functions can be selected to guarantee continued and stable performance of the thermal overload protection when the coolant temperature measurement has failed.

Default temperature value: The coolant temperature set at T H E R M : D e f a u l t C T A P S x is applied. The thermal overload protection is not blocked.

Last measured temperature: As a rule there is an erratic change of the measured value when a fault has occurred in the coolant temperature measurement. The temperature measured before such an erratic change is stored and applied. The thermal overload protection is not blocked.

The coolant temperature set at T H E R M : D e f a u l t C T A P S x is applied if no last measured values are available because a device warm restart or a parameter subset selection was carried out.

Blocking: The signals THERM: Warning and THERM: Tr ip s ignal are reset and blocked. The thermal model will then be continued and displayed on the basis of the measured current alone. All further measurands are issued as "not measured".

All relevant parameters for coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition are hidden if none of the two analog modules Y available have been fitted. The tripping time is calculated by including the setting for T H E R M : D e f a u l t C T A P S x .

Thermal overload protection operation without coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition

In order to guarantee thermal overload protection, without considering an offset due to a variable coolant temperature, it is recommended to set the parameter T H E R M : D e f a u l t C T A P S x to the maximum permitted coolant temperature.


U-50 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

THERM: With CTA

305 201

MEASI: Open circ. PT 100

[ 040 190 ]

MEASI: Overload 20mA input

[ 040 191 ]

&

0

0: Without

1: PT 100

>1

THERM: Select

meas.inputPSx

[ * ]

THERM: Sel.

backup th. PSx

THERM: Select

meas.inputPSx

072 177 072 080

073 177 073 080

074 177 074 080

075 177 074 080

Parameter

set 1

set 2

set 3

set 4

2: 20mA Input

&

>1

MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp.

[ 040 192 ]

>1

THERM: KTE gestört EXT

[ 038 062 ]

THERM: CTA error

[ 039 111 ]SFMON: CTA error

[ 098 034 ]

THERM: Block. by

CTA error

305 200

1

2

n

n = 3 ... 11: Tx

MEASI: Open circ. Tx

[ * ]

&

&

0

0: Without

1: PT 100

>1

THERM: Sel. backup

th. PSx

[ * ]

2: 20mA Input

&

>1

>1

1

2

n

n = 3 ... 11: Ty

MEASI: Open circ. Ty

[ * ]

&

&

>1

& >1

1

1: Default temp. value

2: Last meas.temperat.

THERM: Funct.f.

CTA fail. PSx

[ * ]

3: Blocked

2

3

&

&

076 177

077 177

078 177

079 177

040 218

040 219

040 252

040 253

T6

T7

T8

T9

040 194

040 195

040 208

040 209

T2

T3

T4

T5

TyTx

040 193

MEASI: Open

circ.

T1

040 218

040 219

040 252

040 253

040 194

040 195

040 208

040 209

040 193

THERM: Funct.f.

CTA fail. PSx

19Z6110A_EN

U-4 Coolant temperature monitoring


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-51

Relative replica The rated operating current of the protected object and its overload tolerance for maximum coolant (ambient) temperature are the basis of the relative thermal replica.

In the "Relative replica" operating mode, the following settings have to be made for thermal overload protection:

The rated operating current of the protected object T H E R M : I r e f P S x

The tripping threshold ∆ϑtrip is set at T H E R M : R e l . O / T t r i p P S x

If coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition is used, the following parameters must be set:

The maximum permissible temperature of the protected object Θmax T H E R M : M a x . p e r m . o b j . t m p . P S x

The maximum coolant temperature (maximum ambient) Θa,max T H E R M : M a x . p e r m . c o o l . t m p P S x

Absolute replica The thermal limit current of the protected object is the reference current of the absolute thermal replica. For this limit current, an overtemperature results at the maximum coolant temperature.

In the "Absolute replica" operating mode, the following parameters have to be set for thermal overload protection:

The thermal limit current of the protected object T H E R M : I r e f P S x

The limit temperature for tripping Θmax T H E R M : M a x . p e r m . o b j . t m p . P S x

The overtemperature as a result of a persistent limit current (Θmax - Θa,max ) T H E R M : O / T f . I r e f p e r s . P S x

Note: The maximum permissible coolant temperature Θa,max is derived from the difference between the parameters THERM: Max.perm.obj . tmp.PSx and THERM: O/T f . I ref pers. PSx

Tripping characteristics The maximum RMS phase current I is used to track a first-order thermal replica as specified in IEC 255-8. Other than the operating mode dependent settings the following parameters will govern the tripping time:

The set thermal time constant τ of the protected object THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PS

The accumulated thermal load ∆ϑ0.

The current measured coolant temperature Θa.


U-52 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

The tripping threshold in the two operating modes is calculated as follows:

⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛Θ−ΘΘ−Θ

−⋅ϑ∆−⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛

ϑ∆−⎟⎟⎠

⎞⎜⎜⎝

⎛

⋅τ=

max,amax

max,aatrip

2

ref

0

2

ref

1II

II

lnt

The tripping threshold ∆ϑtrip is set to a fixed value of 100 % ( = 1 ) if the operating mode is "Absolute replica".

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

I/Iref

t/min

D5Z50BE

30

1000

1

τ/min

θtrip / %

1000

10000

100

10

1

0.1

0.01

0.00

200

110

50

200

200

110

110

50

50

U-5 Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to ∆ϑ0 = 0 % and identical settings for the maximum permissible coolant temperature and coolant temperature)


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-53

Warning Depending on the selected operating mode, a warning signal can be set at one of the following parameters:

Relative replica: THERM: Rel . O/T warning PSx

Absolute replica: THERM: Warning temp. PSx

Additionally, a pre-trip time limit can be set; when the time left until tripping falls below this pre-trip limit, a warning will be issued.

Trip

The trip threshold is set according to the selected operating mode with the following parameters:

Relative replica: THERM: Rel . O/T t r ip PSx

Absolute replica: THERM: Max.perm.obj . tmp.PSx

If a trip command is issued, the trip signal is maintained until the status of the thermal replica has decreased by the value T H E R M : T r i p H y s t e r e s i s P S x , at least for a fixed time of 5s.

Cooling

If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the thermal replica is applied with the set time constant THERM: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx. This element in the thermal model takes account of the cooling characteristics of stopped motors.

Note: These two time constants should be set to the same value for transformers and power lines.

Operation together with the motor protection function

If the thermal overload protection function is operated together with the motor protection function (function group MP) and if another startup of an asynchronous motor occurs (other than the first startup), then the thermal overload protection function will be temporarily blocked during the startup time.

The motor protection will effect the thermal overload protection and not vice versa if both protection functions are applied simultaneously.


U-54 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

MAIN: Protection active

306 001

Iph,maxTHERM: Starting k*Iref>

[ 041 108 ]

&

IA

IB

IC

COMP

AR_MV

THERM: I

305 202

c

THERM: Enabled

[ 040 068 ]

MP: Block. replica THERM304 700

&THERM: Block. by CTA error

305 200

THERM: Therm.repl.block

[ 041 074 ]

THERM: Iref PSx

[ * ]

k*Iref

THERM: Start.fact. OL_RC PSx

[ * ]

<0.1 Iref

THERM:Absolute replica

[ 022 065 ]

0

1

0: No

1: Yes

THERM:Relative replica

[ 022 064 ]

0

1

0: No

1: Yes

c

I/Iref

THERM: with CTA

305 201

Coolant temperature

R

THERM: Reset replica

[ 039 061 ]

cTHERM: Tim. const.1,>Ibl PSx

[ * ]

THERM: Tim. const.2,<Ibl PSx

[ * ]

THERM: Default CTA PSx

[ * ]

THERM: O/T f. Iref pers. PSx

[ * ]

THERM: Warning temp. PSx

[ * ]

THERM: Max. perm.obj.tmp.PSx

[ * ]

THERM: Max.perm. cool.tmpPSx

[ * ]

THERM: Rel. O/T warning PSx

[ * ]

THERM: Rel. O/T trip PSx

[ * ]

THERM: Hysteresis trip PSx

[ * ]

THERM: Warning pre-trip PSx

[ * ]

THERM: Therm. replica p.u. [ 004 017 ]

THERM: Object temp. p.u. [ 004 179 ]

THERM: Coolant temp. p.u. [ 004 178 ]

THERM: Temp. offset replica [ 004 109 ]

THERM: Pre-trip time left [ 004 139 ]

THERM: Coolant temperature [ 004 149 ]

THERM: Object temperature [ 004 137 ]

THERM: Status THERM replica [ 004 016 ]

THERM: Buffer empty [ 039 112 ]

THERM: Reclosure blocked [ 039 024 ]

THERM: Trip signal [ 039 020 ]

THERM: Warning [ 039 025 ]

THERM: Setting error, block. [ 039 110 ]

SFMON: Setting error THERM

[ 098 035 ]

THERM: Within pre-trip time

[ 041 109 ]

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

c

THERM: Tim. const.1,>Ibl PSx

THERM: Start.fact. OL_RC PSx

072 180 072 187

073 180 073 187

074 180 074 187

075 180 074 187

Parameter

set 1

set 2

set 3

set 4

THERM: Tim. const.2,<Ibl PSx

072 188

073 188

074 188

075 188

THERM: Warning temp. PSx

THERM: O/T f.Iref pers. PSx

072 167 072 153

073 167 073 153

074 167 074 153

075 167 074 153

THERM: Max. perm.obj.tmp.PSx

072 182

073 182

074 182

075 182

THERM: Rel. O/T warning PSx

THERM: Max.perm. cool.tmpPSx

072 185 072 184

073 185 073 184

074 185 074 184

075 185 075 184

Parameter

set 1

set 2

set 3

set 4

THERM: Rel. O/T trip PSx

072 181

073 181

074 181

075 181

THERM: Hysteresis trip PSx

THERM: Default CTA PSx

072 186 072 183

073 186 073 183

074 186 074 183

075 186 074 183

THERM: Warning pre-trip PSx

072 191

072 191

073 191

074 191

c

19Z6111A_EN

U-6 Thermal overload protection


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-55

Reset The thermal replica may be reset from an appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.

THERM: Reset replica

[ 039 061 ]

Q9Z5020A_EN

THERM: Rset.therm.

repl.USER

[ 022 061 ]

0: don't

execute1: execute

1

0

THERM: Enabled

[ 040 068 ]

THERM: Reset replica EXT

[ 038 061 ]

U-7 Resetting the thermal replica

2.6.2 Address List

Configuration parameters Address Description Range of Values Units

056 023 THERM: Function group THERM Without / With

Function parameters, general functions


022 050 THERM: Enabled No / Yes

022 064 THERM: Relative replica No / Yes

022 065 THERM: Absolute replica No / Yes


U-56 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Function parameters, parameter set x, relative replica


072 175 073 175 074 175 075 175 THERM: Enabled PSx No / Yes

072 177 073 177 074 177 075 177 THERM: Select meas.inputPSx Without / PT100 / 20mA Input / T1 / T2 / T3 / T4 / T5 / T6 / T7 / T8 / T9

072 080 073 080 074 080 075 080 THERM: Sel. backup th. PSx Without / PT100 / 20mA Input / T1 / T2 / T3 / T4 / T5 / T6 / T7 / T8 / T9

072 179 073 179 074 179 075 179 THERM: Iref PSx 0.10 ... 1.00 ... 4.00 Inom

072 180 073 180 074 180 075 180 THERM: Start.fact.OL_RC PSx 1.05 ... 1.15 ... 1.50

072 187 073 187 074 187 075 187 THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx 1.0 ... 30.0 ... 1000.0 min

072 188 073 188 074 188 075 188 THERM: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx 1.0 ... 30.0 ... 1000.0 Min

072 182 073 182 074 182 075 182 THERM: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx 0 ... 120 ... 300 °C

072 185 073 185 074 185 075 185 THERM: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx 0 ... 40 ... 70 °C

072 186 073 186 074 186 075 186 THERM: Default CTA PSx -40 ... 40 ... 70 °C

072 184 073 184 074 184 075 184 THERM: Rel. O/T warning PSx 50 ... 95 ... 200 %

072 181 073 181 074 181 075 181 THERM: Rel. O/T trip PSx 50 ... 100 ... 200 %

072 183 073 183 074 183 075 183 THERM: Hysteresis trip PSx 2 ... 30 %

072 191 073 191 074 191 075 191 THERM: Warning pre-trip PSx 0.0 ... 30.0 ... 1000.0 min

076 177 077 177 078 177 079 177 THERM: Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx Default temp. value / Last meas.temperat. / Blocked

Function parameters, parameter set x absolute replica


072 175 073 175 074 175 075 175 THERM: Enabled PSx No / Yes

072 177 073 177 074 177 075 177 THERM: Select meas.inputPSx Without / PT100 / 20mA Input / T1 / T2 / T3 / T4 / T5 / T6 / T7 / T8 / T9

072 080 073 080 074 080 075 080 THERM: Sel. backup th. PSx Without / PT100 / 20mA Input / T1 / T2 / T3 / T4 / T5 / T6 / T7 / T8 / T9

072 179 073 179 074 179 075 179 THERM: Iref PSx 0.10 ... 1.00 ... 4.00 Inom

072 180 073 180 074 180 075 180 THERM: Start.fact.OL_RC PSx 1.05 ... 1.15 ... 1.50

072 187 073 187 074 187 075 187 THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx 1.0 ... 30.0 ... 1000.0 min

072 188 073 188 074 188 075 188 THERM: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx 1.0 ... 30.0 ... 1000.0 Min

072 167 073 167 074 167 075 167 THERM: O/T f.Iref pers. PSx 0 ... 80 ... 300 K

072 182 073 182 074 182 075 182 THERM: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx 0 ... 120 ... 300 °C

072 153 073 153 074 153 075 153 THERM: Warning temp. PSx 0 ... 95 ... 300 °C

072 186 073 186 074 186 075 186 THERM: Default CTA PSx -40 ... 40 ... 70 °C

072 183 073 183 074 183 075 183 THERM: Hysteresis trip PSx 2 ... 30 %

072 191 073 191 074 191 075 191 THERM: Warning pre-trip PSx 0.0 ... 30.0 ... 1000.0 min

076 177 077 177 078 177 079 177 THERM: Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx Default temp. value / Last meas.temperat. / Blocked


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-57

Measured operating data Address Description Range of Values Units

004 016 THERM: Status THERM replica -25000 ... 25000 / Not measured

%

004 137 THERM: Object temperature -40 ... 300 / Not measured °C

004 149 THERM: Coolant temperature -40 ... 200 / Not measured °C

004 139 THERM: Pre-trip time left 0.0 ... 1000.0 / Not measured

Min

004 017 THERM: Therm. replica p.u. -2.50 ... 2.50 / Not measured

100%

004 179 THERM: Object temp. p.u. -0.40 ... 3.00 / Not measured

100°C

004 178 THERM: Coolant temp. p.u. -0.40 ... 2.00 / Not measured

100°C

004 109 THERM: Temp. offset replica -25000 ... 25000 / Not measured

%

Logic state signals Address Description Range of Values Units

041 074 THERM: Therm.repl.block EXT No / Yes

038 061 THERM: Reset replica EXT No / Yes

040 068 THERM: Enabled No / Yes

039 061 THERM: Reset replica No / Yes

041 108 THERM: Starting k*Iref> No / Yes

038 062 THERM: CTA error EXT No / Yes

039 025 THERM: Warning No / Yes

039 020 THERM: Trip signal No / Yes

040 035 THERM: Not ready No / Yes

039 024 THERM: Reclosure blocked No / Yes

039 112 THERM: Buffer empty No / Yes

039 111 THERM: CTA error No / Yes

041 109 THERM: Within pre-trip time No / Yes

039 110 Setting error,block. No / Yes

Control and testing Address Description Range of Values Units

022 061 THERM: Rset.therm.repl.USER don't execute / execute


U-58 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

2.7 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)


As of version -611 extensive features have been added to the circuit breaker failure protection, which are described below.

The P139 features the CB failure protection function. After a trip command has been issued the CBF function monitors that the circuit breaker has actually been triggered.

Enable/disable circuit breaker failure protection

The parameter CBF: General enable USER is used to enable the function. In addition to this parameter setting the CBF function may also be enabled/disabled by operating parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Operating parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If only the function CBF: Enable EXT is assigned to a binary signal input, then circuit breaker protection will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the function CBF: Disable EXT has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-59

Readiness of circuit breaker protection

Circuit breaker failure protection will not be available under the following conditions:

Circuit breaker failure protection has not been enabled.

Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input.

All CBF timer stages have been set to "blocked".

19Z6130A_EN

CBF: Enabled

[ 040 055 ]

&

>1CBF: Not ready

[ 040 025 ]

>1CBF: Blocking EXT

[ 038 058 ]CBF: t1 3p

[ 022 165 ] Blocked&

CBF: t2

[ 022 166 ] BlockedCBF: Delay/starting trig.

[ 022 155 ] BlockedCBF: Delay/fault beh. CB

[ 022 171 ] BlockedCBF: Delay/CB sync.superv

[ 022 172 ] Blocked

U-8 Signal CBF: No t ready

Detecting a CB triggering A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB triggering.

Protection functions, that have triggering criteria not directly dependent on current flow, may additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts for evaluation.

Current flow monitoring This function is used to detect a break in current flow, i.e. safely, immediately and pole selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values with the set threshold value CBF: I>.

As long as current flow criteria are met the monitoring function will continuously issue the phase selective signals CBF: Current f low A, CBF: Current f low B, CBF: Current f low C and the multiple signal CBF: Current f low Phx.


U-60 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Evaluation of CB status signals

Trip signals included in the Gen. t r ip command 1, which use CB status signals in addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected with the parameter CBF: Fct .assignm. CBAux.

Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available. The P139 is capable of checking the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluating them:

The CB open signal: MAIN: CB open 3p EXT

The CB closed signal: MAIN: CB c losed s ig. EXT

The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked if the configuration of the respective binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. This will result in the P139 issuing the signal CBF: CB pos. implausib le . Evaluation of current criteria are not affected by this blocking.

&

MAIN: CB open 3p EXT

[ 031 028 ]

INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx

[ xxx yyy ]

U x01

U x02

U x03

U xxx

Address 036 028

Address 036 051

MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT

[ 036 051 ]

&

&

>1

&CBF: CB pos. implausible

[ 038 210 ]

19Z6131A_EN

U-9 Plausibility check of CB status signals

If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured, the P139 will always consider this as plausible.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-61

CBF startup criteria The startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is recognized as closed during a start criterion. The following criteria are evaluated as a startup criterion:

Internal startup criterion: Generating the Gen. t r ip s ignal 1 is considered a start criterion. In addition it may be selected, by setting the parameter CBF: Start for manual t r ip, that a manual trip signal will be used as a start criterion. Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts are evaluated when no current flow is registered and the respective trip signal, included in the Gen. t r ip command 1, has been selected from the protection function in parameter CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux for the evaluation of the CB auxiliary contacts.

External startup criterion: Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (CBF: Star t 3p EXT) may be used as a start criterion. To be on the safe side an additional two pole triggering may be implemented by applying the signal CBF: Star t enable EXT. Current flow monitoring is the primary evaluation criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts are evaluated when no current flow is registered.

Timer stages and output logic

Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.

The signal CBF: Tr ip s ignal t1 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time period, set at timer stage CBF: t1 3p, has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.

The signal CBF: Tr ip s ignal t2 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time period, set at timer stage CBF: t2, has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit breaker or protection system.

These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met. Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the explosion chambers of installed type SF-6 circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately tripped without waiting for a reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an external CB fault the elapse of timer stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal to the binary signal input appropriately configured at CBF: CB faul ty EXT.


U-62 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

19Z6132A_EN

m out of n

Signal 1

Signal 2

Signal n

Selected signals

CBF: I>

[ 022 160 ]

IA

IB

IC

>1

CBF: CB pos. implausible

[ 038 210 ]

MAIN:CB open 3p EXT

[ 031 028 ]


[ 036 051 ]

>1

&

>1

1

1

1S

R

&

&

>1

>1

&

&

>1CBF: Startup 3p

[ 038 211 ]

MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1

[ 036 005 ]

INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx

[ xxx yyy ]

U x01

U x02

Ux03

U xxx

Address 038 209

CBF: Enable Start EXT

[ 038 209 ]

&

CBF: Start 3p EXT

[ 038 205 ]

& >1

CBF: Start for manual trip

[ 022 154 ]

0

1

0: No 1: Yes

&

MAIN: Manual trip signal

[ 034 017 ]

& >1&MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked

[ 021 013 ]

CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux.

[ 022 159 ]

U-10 Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-63

19Z6133A_EN

c

t 0

CBF: Not ready

[ 040 025 ]

CBF: Startup 3p

[ 038 211 ]

CBF: Trip signal t1

[ 038 215 ]

CBF: Trip signal t2

[ 038 219 ]

&

>1

CBF: CB faulty EXT

[ 038 234 ]

CBF: t1 3p

[ 022 165 ]

c

t 0

CBF: t2

[ 022 166 ]

U-11 Timer stages of the circuit breaker failure protection

Trip commands While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages available the user can set minimum time delay periods for trip commands.

By appropriate setting it can be selected that trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection, will operate in latching mode. The respective trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.

CBF: Trip signal t1

[ 038 215 ]

CBF: Trip command t1

[ 038 220 ]&

MAIN: Latch. trip c. reset

[ 040 139 ]

t 0

CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t1

[ 022 167 ]

1

1

1S

R

MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked

[ 021 013 ]

CBF: Latching trip cmd.t1

[ 022 169 ]

&0

1

0: No 1: Yes

>1

>1

19Z6134A_EN

CBF: Trip signal t2

[ 038 219 ]

CBF: Trip command t2

[ 038 224 ]& t 0

CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t2

[ 022 168 ]

1

1

1S

R

CBF: Latching trip cmd.t2

[ 022 170 ]

&0

1

0: No 1: Yes

>1

>1

U-12 Trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection


U-64 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Starting trigger The signal CBF: Star t ing will be issued when the signal "Starting trigger" is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a general starting is present. The signal CBF: Tr ip s ignal will be issued after timer stage CBF: Delay/star t ing tr ig. has elapsed.

19Z6135A_EN

MAIN: General starting

[ 040 000 ]

CBF: Starting trig. EXT

[ 038 016 ]

CBF: Trip signal

[ 040 026 ]

CBF: Starting

[ 038 021 ]

&

CBF: Delay/ starting trig.

[ 022 155 ]

U-13 Starting trigger

Fault behind CB protection A fault behind a CB is a fault that may occur between a circuit breaker already open and a CT, which is fed from the remote end.

Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion if the circuit breaker does not provide the information that it is closed after the time delay set at CBF: Delay/ faul t beh. CB has elapsed.

When such a fault behind CB is recognized the signal CBF: Faul t beh. CB is issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an InterMiCOM protective interface. This may also prevent an unwanted triggering of the circuit breaker failure function.

19Z6136A_EN

t 0 CBF: Fault behind CB

[ 038 225 ]&

CBF: Delay/fault beh. CB

[ 022 171 ]CBF: I>

[ 022 160 ]

IA

IB

IC

>1


[ 038 210 ]


[ 031 028 ]


[ 036 051 ]

>1

U-14 Fault behind CB protection


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-65

CB synchronization supervision

CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker contacts are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and evaluation of CB status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB operate times the time delay CBF: Delay/CB synch.superv can be used. When this time period has elapsed the signal CBF: Tr ipSig CB synch.super is issued. Poles that are recognized as being "open" will still be signaled.

19Z6137A_EN

t 0CBF: TripSig CBsync.super

[ 038 226 ]&

CBF: Delay/CB sync.superv

[ 022 172 ]

CBF: I>

[ 022 160 ]

IA

IB

IC

>1


[ 038 210 ]


[ 031 028 ]MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT

[ 036 051 ]

>1

<3

&

&

&CBF: CBsync.superv C open

[ 038 229 ]

CBF: CBsync.superv B open

[ 038 228 ]

CBF: CBsync.superv A open

[ 038 227 ]

U-15 CB synchronization supervision


U-66 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

2.7.2 Address List

Configuration Parameters Address Description Range of Values Units

056 007 CBF: Function group CBF Without / With



022 154 CBF: Start for manual trip No / Yes

022 080 CBF: Enabled No / Yes

022 159 CBF: Fct.assignm. CBAux. Selection table Trip command 1

022 160 CBF: I> 0.05 ... 1.00 ... 20.00 Inom

022 165 CBF: t1 3p 0.00 ... 0.15 ... 100.00 / Blocked

s

022 166 CBF: t2 0.00 ... 0.25 ... 100.00 / Blocked

s

022 167 CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t1 0.10 ... 0.25 ... 10.00 s

022 168 CBF: Min.dur. trip cmd.t2 0.10 ... 0.25 ... 10.00 s

022 169 CBF: Latching trip cmd.t1 No / Yes

022 170 CBF: Latching trip cmd.t2 No / Yes

022 155 CBF: Delay/starting trig. 0.00 ... 100.00 / Blocked s

022 171 CBF: Delay/fault beh. CB 0.00 ... 0.12 ... 100.00 / Blocked

s

022 172 CBF: Delay/CB sync.superv 0.00 ... 100.00 / Blocked S


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-67


038 009 CBF: Ready No / Yes

038 211 CBF: Startup 3p No / Yes

038 016 CBF: Starting trig. EXT No / Yes

038 058 CBF: Blocking EXT No / Yes

038 041 CBF: Enable EXT No / Yes

038 042 CBF: Disable EXT No / Yes

040 055 CBF: Enabled No / Yes

040 025 CBF: Not ready No / Yes

040 026 CBF: Trip signal No / Yes

038 021 CBF: Starting No / Yes

038 040 CBF: Ext./user enabled No / Yes

038 205 CBF: Start 3p EXT No / Yes

038 209 CBF: Start enable EXT No / Yes

038 210 CBF: CB pos. implausible No / Yes

038 215 CBF: Trip signal t1 No / Yes

038 219 CBF: Trip signal t2 No / Yes

038 220 CBF: Trip command t1 No / Yes

038 224 CBF: Trip command t2 No / Yes

038 225 CBF: Fault behind CB No / Yes

038 226 CBF: TripSig CBsync.super No / Yes

038 227 CBF: CBsync.superv A open No / Yes

038 228 CBF: CBsync.superv B open No / Yes

038 229 CBF: CBsync.superv C open No / Yes

038 230 CBF: Current flow A No / Yes

038 231 CBF: Current flow B No / Yes

038 232 CBF: Current flow C No / Yes

038 233 CBF: Current flow Phx No / Yes

038 234 CBF: CB faulty EXT No / Yes

Control and Testing Address Description Range of Values Units

003 016 CBF: Enable USER don't execute / execute

003 015 CBF: Disable USER don't execute / execute


U-68 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

2.8 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM)


As of version –610 the P139 features a circuit breaker monitoring function. This function supports state controlled maintenance of circuit breakers.

Enable/disable circuit breaker monitoring

Circuit breaker monitoring may be disabled or enabled by setting parameters.

Operation Manufacturers of circuit breakers usually provide wear characteristics displaying the maximum number of permissible CB operations in relation to the disconnection current.

Figure U-16 displays the wear characteristics for a circuit breaker with a nominal current of 2000 A and a maximum disconnection current of 63 kA. The medium disconnection current is 48 kA.

19Z6123A_EN

10

100

1000

10000

100000

0,1 1 10 100 Disconnection current in kA

Nu

mb

er

of

pe

rmis

sib

le C

B o

pe

ratio

ns

U-16: Wear characteristics for a circuit breaker


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-69

The knee points in figure U-16 are necessary to set the wear characteristic for the circuit breaker:

The nominal current CBM: Inom,CB for the circuit breaker and the permitted number of CB operations at nominal current CBM: Perm. CB op. Inom,CB

The medium disconnection current CBM: Med. Curr . I t r ip,CB for the circuit breaker and the permitted number of CB operations at medium disconnection current CBM: Perm. CB op. Imed,CB

The maximum disconnection current CBM: Max. curr . I t r ip,CB for the circuit breaker and the permitted number of CB operations at maximum disconnection current CBM: Perm. CB op. Imax,CB

Not all types of circuit breakers have the medium disconnection current available. In such a case the parameters for this knee point are to be set to "blocked". A knee point is not considered in the characteristic when at least one of the parameters for the knee points is set to "blocked".

For proper performance of circuit breaker monitoring it should be observed that the knee points must be applied in a logically correct sequence (continuously descending). When setting currents and numbers of CB operations are not plausible according to the characteristic the P139 will issue an error message and block circuit breaker monitoring.

Calculating the CB wear state

The current wear state of the circuit breaker is given as the number of remaining CB operations at nominal current conditions. The number of remaining CB operations nrem(Inom,CB) is calculated and displayed phase selectively and after each disconnection by the P139. Calculation is per this equation:

( ) ( ) ( )( )CB,d

CB,nomCB,nom0,remCB,nomrem In

InInIn −=

With:

Inom,CB: Nominal current for the CB

n(Inom,CB): Max permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB

Id,CB: Disconnection current

n(Id,CB): Permitted number of CB operations at Id,CB according to wear characteristics

nrem,0(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB before disconnection

nrem,(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB after disconnection


U-70 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Operating modes Setting the parameter CBM: Operat ing mode will select the condition under which the function will be triggered:

with t r ip cmd. only : Function is triggered only by the general trip command 1

with CB s ig. EXT only: Function is triggered by the CB open signal generated by an auxiliary contact

CB s ig. EXT or t r ip : Function is triggered by the general trip command 1 or the CB open signal generated by an auxiliary contact

Measured values and counters are re-determined with each triggering and compared with set threshold values.

A correction value can be set in order to determine the trip time CBM: Corr . acquis. t ime. This enables proper evaluation of leading or lagging mapping contacts or the delay period between forming of the trip command and opening of the CB contacts.

Linking control functions with the trip command

With the P139, the trip command from the control function can be linked with the general trip command 1 of the protection, when setting external devices. In such a case the trip command from the control function must be associated by the parameter CBM: Sig. asg. Tr ip cmd. so that operational trip commands, issued to the circuit breaker by the control function, are considered additionally to the general trip command 1.

19Z6124A_EN

CBM: Sig. asg. trip

cmd.

[ 022 152 ]

m out of nSignal 1

Signal 2

Signal n

Selected signals CBM: Internal trip cmd

MAIN: Gen. trip command 1

[ 036 071 ]

>1

U-17 Forming the linked trip command

The external devices status signal "open" may be linked to the control function status signal "open" by setting the parameter CBM: Sig. asg. Tr ip cmd. so that the function in the P139 will be triggered by CB auxiliary contacts.


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-71

19Z6125A_EN

MAIN: Sig. asg.

CB open

[ 021 017 ]

m out of n

Signal 1

Signal 2

Signal n

Selected signals MAIN: Internal trip cmd

MAIN: CB Open 3P Ext

[ 031 028 ]

>1

U-18 Forming the linked "open" status signal

Pole selective counter values and measured values

The P139 separately evaluates each phase current and generates an individual wear presentation for each CB pole.

The following counter values are presented pole selectively:

Number of CB operations made, without consideration of disconnection currents

Number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current

The following measured values are presented pole selectively, and per-unit values refer to CB nominal current:

Primary disconnection current

Per-unit disconnection current

Second power of the per-unit disconnection current

Sum of the per-unit disconnection currents

Sum of the second power of the per-unit disconnection currents

Current-time integral of the per-unit disconnection current

Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit disconnection currents

The disconnection current is derived from the RMS current value detected before a last zero crossing.

The integral of the current-time area is calculated between the trip time and current breaking-off. Current breaking-off is recognized when there are no further current zero crossings detected. An example for calculation of the current-time integral is displayed in figure U-19.


U-72 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Berechnung des Strom - Zeit - Integrals-20,00

-15,00

-10,00

-5,00

0,00

5,00

10,00

15,00

20,00

General trip command 1

19Z6126A_EN

Correction time running

U-19 Calculation of the current-time integral when CBM is triggered by a general trip command 1

Resetting measured values Measured values from the respective last CB tripping may be reset via the interfaces on the device. Accumulated measured values are not affected by such a reset operation.

Setting measured values Setting measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function is necessary when the respective CB has already been exposed to operating conditions or has been replaced. The available interfaces on the device may be used to set measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function.

Note: Only such measured values and counter values in the P139 may be set to new values that do not have their default values set to "blocked". The stored value will remain unchanged if the default value is set to "blocked". Executing the set command results in initializing all default values in the P139 to "blocked".


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-73

MAIN: Protection active

306 001

&

0

1

0: with trip cmd. only

1: with CB sig.EXT only

2

2: CB sig.EXT or trip

&

CBM: Enabled

[ 044 130 ]

CBM: Itrip x

[ * ]

&

CBM: Operating mode

[ 022 007 ]

c

&

MAIN: Internal CB trip

>1

>1

c

c

Ix

fnom

CBM: Blocked

[ 044 199 ]

R

R

R

CBM: Itrip,prim Lx

[ * ]

CBM: Itrip**2 x

[ * ] R

CBM: I*t x

[ * ]

CBM: –Itrip x

[ * ]

CBM: –Itrip**2 x

[ * ]

CBM: –I*t x

[ * ]

CBM: No. of CB oper. x

[ * ]

CBM: Remain. No. CB op. x

[ * ]

CBM: Reset meas. values

[ 003 013 ]

S

S

S

S

S

c

CBM: Initialize values

[ 003 011 ]

CBM: Set No. CB oper. x

022 131 022 134

022 132 022 135

022 133 022 136

CBM: Set remain. CB op. x

CBM: Set –Itrip x CBM: Set –Itrip**2 x

CBM: Set –I*t x CBM: No. of CB oper. x

CBM: Remain. No. CB op. x

Phase x / Current Ix

A / IA

B / IB

C / IC

022 137 022 140

022 138 022 141

022 139 022 142

022 143

022 144

022 145

008 011

008 012

008 013

008 014

008 015

008 016

CBM: Itrip x

009 047 009 061

009 048 009 062

009 049 009 063

CBM: I*t x CBM: Itrip,prim Lx CBM: Itrip**2 x CBM: –Itrip x CBM: –Itrip**2 x CBM: –I*t xPhase x / Current Ix

A / IA

B/ IB

C / IC

009 212 009 051

009 213 009 052

009 214 009 053

009 071

009 073

009 076

009 077

009 078

009 079

009 087

009 088

009 089

CBM: Internal trip cmd

19Z6120A_EN

CBM: Inom,CB

[ 022 012 ]MAIN: Inom C.T. prim.

[ 010 001 ]

CBM: Perm. CB op. Inom,CB

[ 022 013 ]

CBM: Perm. CB op. Imax,CB

[ 022 017 ]

CBM: Max. curr. Itrip,CB

[ 022 016 ]

CBM: Perm. CB op. Imed,CB

[ 022 015 ]

CBM: Med. curr. Itrip,CB

[ 022 014 ]

CBM: Perm. CB op. Inom,CB

[ 022 013 ]

CBM: Set No. CB oper. x

[ * ] CBM: Set remain. CB op. x

[ * ]

CBM: Set –Itrip x

[ * ] CBM: Set –Itrip**2 x

[ * ]

CBM: Set –I*t x

[ * ]

U-20 Triggering and calculating circuit breaker monitoring


U-74 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Monitoring the number of CB operations

Depending on the selected operating mode the P139 will calculate the current wear state of the circuit breaker after each disconnection. The number of remaining CB operations at CB nominal current are calculated and displayed. A threshold value can be set with the parameter CBM: No. CB operat ions <. An alarm is issued should the number of remaining CB operations drop below this threshold.

19Z6121A_EN

>1CBM: Sig. Rem. No.CB op.<

[ 044 136 ]

CBM: Remain No. CB

op. <

[ 022 020 ]

c

CBM: Remain. No. CB op. A

[ 008 014 ]

CBM: Remain. No. CB op. B

[ 008 015 ]

CBM: Remain. No. CB op. C

[ 008 016 ]

U-21 Monitoring the remaining number of CB operations at nominal current

At the same time each switching operation will increment the P139 counter for the number of CB operations The number of CB operations made is displayed. A threshold value can be set with the parameter CBM: No. CB operat ions >. An alarm is issued should the number of CB operations made exceed this threshold.

19Z6122A_EN

>1CBM: Sig. No. CB op. >

[ 044 135 ]

CBM: No. CB

operations >

[ 022 019 ]

c

CBM: No. of CB oper. A

[ 008 011 ]

CBM: No. of CB oper. B

[ 008 012 ]

CBM: No. of CB oper. C

[ 008 013 ]

U-22 Monitoring the number of CB operations made


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-75

Monitoring disconnected currents

In addition to the evaluation of the CB wear state and monitoring of the number of CB operations made, the P139 features the means to accumulate and display disconnection current values and the second power of these values. Threshold values can be set with the parameters CBM: Σ I t r ip >, CBM: Σ I t r ip**2 > and CBM: Σ I * t . An alarm is issued should the accumulated current values exceed any of these thresholds.

Blocking circuit breaker monitoring

When protection injection testing is carried out the circuit breaker monitoring function should be blocked, so that such testing does not corrupt monitoring results. CBM protection is blocked if one of the following conditions is met:

Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by parameters.

Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input.

46Z5033A_EN

>1

CBM: General enable USER

[ 022 010 ]

CBM: Blocked

[ 044 199 ]

CBM: Blocking USER

[ 022 150 ]

CBM: Blocking EXT

[ 044 128 ]

&

U-23 Blocking circuit breaker monitoring


U-76 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

2.8.2 Address List


056 062 CBM: Function group CBM Without / With



022 152 CBM: Sig. asg. trip cmd. Selected signals

022 010 CBM: Enabled No / Yes

022 150 CBM: Blocking USER No / Yes

022 007 CBM: Operating mode with Trip cmd. only / with CB sig.EXT only / CB sig.EXT or trip

022 012 CBM: Inom,CB 1 ... 2000 ... 65000 A

022 013 CBM: Perm. CB op. Inom,CB 1 ... 30000 ... 65000

022 014 CBM: Med. curr. Itrip,CB 1 ... 65000 / Blocked A

022 015 CBM: Perm. CB op. Imed,CB 1 ... 65000 / Blocked

022 016 CBM: Max. curr. Itrip,CB 1 ... 63000 ... 65000 A

022 017 CBM: Perm. CB op. Imax,CB 1 ... 20 ... 65000

022 019 CBM: No. CB operations > 1 ... 10000 ... 65000

022 020 CBM: Remain No. CB op. < 1 ... 1000 ... 65000

022 022 CBM: ΣItrip> 1 ... 1000 ... 65000 Inom,CB

022 081 CBM: ΣItrip**2> 1 ... 1000 ... 65000 Inom,CB**2

022 096 CBM: ΣI*t> 1 ... 1000 ... 4000 kAs

022 018 CBM: Corr. acquis. time 0.001 ... 0.000 ... 0.200 s


044 128 CBM: Blocking EXT No / Yes

044 130 CBM: Enabled No / Yes

044 205 CBM: Cycle running A No / Yes

044 206 CBM: Cycle running B No / Yes

044 207 CBM: Cycle running C No / Yes

044 199 CBM: Blocked No / Yes

044 135 CBM: Sig. No. CB op. > No / Yes

044 136 CBM: Sig. Rem. No.CB op.< No / Yes

044 137 CBM: Signal ΣItrip> No / Yes

044 138 CBM: Signal ΣItrip**2> No / Yes

044 139 CBM: Signal ΣI*t> No / Yes

044 177 CBM: tmax> A No / Yes

044 178 CBM: tmax> B No / Yes

044 179 CBM: tmax> C No / Yes

044 201 CBM: Curr. flow ended A No / Yes

044 202 CBM: Curr. flow ended B No / Yes

044 203 CBM: Curr. flow ended C No / Yes

044 204 CBM: Setting error CBM No / Yes


P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 U-77

Control and Testing Address Description Range of Values Units

003 011 CBM: Initialize values don't execute / execute

003 013 CBM: Reset meas. values don't execute / execute

022 131 CBM: Set No. CB oper. A 0 ... 65000 / Blocked

022 132 CBM: Set No. CB oper. B 0 ... 65000 / Blocked

022 133 CBM: Set No. CB oper. C 0 ... 65000 / Blocked

022 134 CBM: Set remain. CB op. A 0 ... 65000 / Blocked

022 135 CBM: Set remain. CB op. B 0 ... 65000 / Blocked

022 136 CBM: Set remain. CB op. C 0 ... 65000 / Blocked

022 137 CBM: Set ΣItrip A 0 ... 65000 / Blocked Inom,CB

022 138 CBM: Set ΣItrip B 0 ... 65000 / Blocked Inom,CB

022 139 CBM: Set ΣItrip C 0 ... 65000 / Blocked Inom,CB

022 140 CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 A 0 ... 65000 / Blocked Inom,LS**2

022 141 CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 B 0 ... 65000 / Blocked Inom,LS**2

022 142 CBM: Set ΣItrip**2 C 0 ... 65000 / Blocked Inom,LS**2

022 143 CBM: Set ΣI*t A 0.0 ... 4000.0 / Blocked kAs

022 144 CBM: Set ΣI*t B 0.0 ... 4000.0 / Blocked kAs

022 145 CBM: Set ΣI*t C 0.0 ... 4000.0 / Blocked kAs

Event counters Address Description Range of Values Units

008 011 CBM: No. of CB oper. A 0 ... 65000

008 012 CBM: No. of CB oper. B 0 ... 65000

008 013 CBM: No. of CB oper. C 0 ... 65000

008 014 CBM: Remain. No. CB op. A 0 ... 65000

008 015 CBM: Remain. No. CB op. B 0 ... 65000

008 016 CBM: Remain. No. CB op. C 0 ... 65000


U-78 P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611

Measured event data Address Description Range of Values Units

009 212 CBM: Itrip,prim A 0 ... 65000 / Not measured A

009 213 CBM: Itrip,prim B 0 ... 65000 / Not measured A

009 214 CBM: Itrip,prim C 0 ... 65000 / Not measured A

009 047 CBM: Itrip A 0.00 ... 100.00 / Not measured

Inom,CB

009 048 CBM: Itrip B 0.00 ... 100.00 / Not measured

Inom,CB

009 049 CBM: Itrip C 0.00 ... 100.00 / Not measured

Inom,CB

009 051 CBM: Itrip**2 A 0.00 ... 6000.00 / Not measured

Inom,LS**

009 052 CBM: Itrip**2 B 0.00 ... 6000.00 / Not measured

Inom,LS**

009 053 CBM: Itrip**2 C 0.00 ... 6000.00 / Not measured

Inom,LS**

009 071 CBM: ΣItrip A 0 ... 65000 Inom,CB

009 073 CBM: ΣItrip B 0 ... 65000 Inom,CB

009 076 CBM: ΣItrip C 0 ... 65000 Inom,CB

009 077 CBM: ΣItrip**2 A 0 ... 65000 Inom,LS**2

009 078 CBM: ΣItrip**2 B 0 ... 65000 Inom,LS**2

009 079 CBM: ΣItrip**2 C 0 ... 65000 Inom,LS**2

009 061 CBM: I*t A 0 ... 60000 / Not measured As

009 062 CBM: I*t B 0 ... 60000 / Not measured As

009 063 CBM: I*t C 0 ... 60000 / Not measured As

009 087 CBM: ΣI*t A 0.0 ... 4000.0 kAs

009 088 CBM: ΣI*t B 0.0 ... 4000.0 kAs

009 089 CBM: ΣI*t C 0.0 ... 4000.0 kAs

P139/EN AD/A77 // AFSV.12.09690 D /// P139-306-408/409/410-611 Ä-79


Pu

blic

atio

n:

P1

39

/EN

AD

/A7

7 (A

FSV

.12

.09

69

0.D

)

MiCOM P139 Feeder Management and Bay

Control Version: P139 -306 -408/409/410 -611 P139 -307 -411/412/413 -612

Upgrade Documentation

P139/EN AD/A88 (AFSV.12.09950.D)

P139 -612 Upgrade Description

P139/EN AD/A88 // AFSV.12.09950 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-612 U-3

Contents

1 Overview U-5

2 Functional Details U-9

2.1 Detachable HMI U-9

2.1.1 Address List U-11

P139 -612 Upgrade Description (continued)

U-4 P139/EN AD/A88 // AFSV.12.09950 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-612

In the new version of the P139 several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been included. These are described with references to the Technical Manual and Upgrade Documentation listed below.

References Released Version Documentation

28.11.2003 P139-304-405/406/407-605 Technical Manual AFSV.12.09450/1 EN

07.11.2005 P139-306-408/409/410-611 Upgrade Documentation AFSV.12.09660 EN


P139/EN AD/A88 // AFSV.12.09950 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-612 U-5

1 Overview

Version Changes

This is a preliminary IEC 61850 version, which is project-specific and only available on request!

P139-306-408/409/410-611-706 Release: 21.12.2005



Software

ASC Bug fixing: When the automatic synchronism check (ASC) was linked to the control of an external device and a close command was issued to this external device from the local control panel, the external device was always blocked from closing by the ASC function. This error occurred only when the communication protocol per IEC 61850 was used with the protection and control unit.

P139-306-408/409/410-611-707 Release: 16.02.2006



Software

IEC Bug fixing: The range of the internal values assigned to the various operating modes of the parameter IEC: DEV control model (221 081) now starts with a '1' instead of a '0'.

INP The request routine for binary signal inputs has been enhanced to suppress external interference.

P139-306-408/409/410-611-709 Release: 05.10.2006



Software

IEC Bug fixing: If communication was interrupted during control access via the Ethernet interface using the operating program MiCOM S1, renewed control access was only possible after a warm restart of the protection and control unit.

Bug fixing: If a 'Select' or 'Operate' command for an external device, in which the interlock bit had been set, was sent from a client to the protection and control unit it could occur that such a command was rejected.


U-6 P139/EN AD/A88 // AFSV.12.09950 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-612

Version Changes

P139-307-411/412/413-612 Hardware As an ordering option for the 40TE and 84TE model versions there is now a variant available with a detachable HMI. The detachable HMI is always supplied with a case width of 40TE. The freely configurable LED indicators H4 to H16 on the detachable HMI are provided as multi-color LEDs.

The ordering option Ethernet module with 100 Mbit/s glass fiber and ST connector has replaced the ordering option Ethernet module with 10 Mbit/s glass fiber and ST connector.

Diagram The updated connection diagrams now include the interfaces to connect the detachable HMI.

P139.411 (for 40TE case, with pin-terminal connection)

P132.412 (for 40TE case, transformer module: ring-terminal connection; other modules: pin-terminal connection)

P139.413 (for 84TE case, with ring-terminal connection)

Software

DVICE Because of the ordering option "detachable HMI" these additional Device Identification parameters are now available:

DVICE: SW version DHMI (002 131) DVICE: SW version DHMI DM (002 132)

LOC Because of the ordering option "detachable HMI" this additional Device Identification parameter is now available: LOC: Local HMI exists (221 099).

Additional item in the selection table for the operation panel: COUNT: Count 1 (217 100).

COMM1 When the protocols per IEC 60870-5-101 or IEC 60870-5-103 are used, the message COMM1: Buffer overrun (221 100) is issued when an internal buffer overrun of the spontaneous control function signals has occurred.


P139/EN AD/A88 // AFSV.12.09950 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-612 U-7

Version Changes

IEC Implementation of active monitoring of the communications data links to logged-on clients with the parameter IEC: TCP keep-al ive t imer (104 062). This active monitoring now replaces previous passive monitoring by parameter IEC: Inact iv i ty t imer (104 050).

Implementation of an automatic switchover to daylight saving time, activated by parameter IEC: Switch.dayl .sav.t ime (104 219). Switchover times for the automatic switch to daylight saving time are governed by the following settings:

IEC: Dayl .sav.t ime star t (104 220) IEC: Dayl .sav.t ime st . d (104 221) IEC: Dayl .sav.t ime st . m (104 222) IEC: Dayl .sav. t .s t .0:00 + (104 223) IEC: Dayl .sav. t ime end (104 225) IEC: Dayl .sav. t ime end d (104 226) IEC: Dayl .sav. t ime end m (104 227) IEC: Dayl .sav. t .end 0:00+ (104 228)

A second SNTP server may now be applied for time synchronization. Should no answer be transmitted by the first SNTP server the next request is automatically transferred to the second SNTP server (backup function).

IEC: SNTP server 1 IP (104 202) IEC: SNTP server 2 IP (104 210)

Instead of setting a router address and target network, so as to establish a communication link to a client situated exterior to the local network, now only the setting of the gateway address is required via IEC: Gateway address (104 011).

Now 'unbuffered reports' are available for all logical nodes.

GOOSE VLAN priority for GOOSE is set via GOOSE: VLAN Pr ior i ty (106 007).

The dataset reference for GOOSE is displayed via the measured value GOOSE: DataSet Reference (106 008).

INP Bug fixing: The input signal MAIN: Man. Tr ip cmd. EXT (037 018) did not operate when it was set as a receive signal for COMM3, GSSE or GOOSE and triggered via this communication link. (Triggering via a binary signal input operated correctly.)

LED The operating mode for the LED indicators has been extended by the operating mode LED flashing.

Configuration, operating mode and physical state of the permanently configured LED indicators H1 and H17 are now displayed via configuration parameters and physical state signals.

The freely configurable LED indicators H4 to H16 on the variant with a detachable HMI may now be assigned two signals, each with a different color (red or green). If both assigned signals are active the resulting LED color will be 'amber' (yellow).


U-8 P139/EN AD/A88 // AFSV.12.09950 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-612

Version Changes

MAIN The parameter MAIN: Time Tag (221 098) has replaced the previous parameter MAIN: TimeTagAfterDebounce (217 083). In addition there is a third operating mode available for selection.

COUNT The settable debouncing time for count value acquisition is no longer required.

P139-307-411/412/413-612-710 Release: 14.12.2006



Software

IEC Bug fixing: If communication was interrupted during control access via the Ethernet interface using the operating program MiCOM S1, renewed control access was only possible after a warm restart of the protection and control unit.

P139-307-411/412/413-612-712 and P139-306-408/409/410-611-711 Release: 14.02.2007



Software

IEC Bug fixing: Previously a break in the client-server communications link could occur after approximately 49 days for about 20 minutes. GOOSE and GSSE are not affected.


P139/EN AD/A88 // AFSV.12.09950 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-612 U-9

2 Functional Details

2.1 Detachable HMI

Application As a further option in the model versions there is now a variant available that includes a detachable HMI. This variant is especially designed for applications where protection and control units are directly installed into bay panels situated in medium-voltage substations and, because of constructural constraints, there is only limited space available. The detachable HMI with its small dimensions may be fitted here in a convenient spot and at an ergonomic height.

Detachable HMI The detachable HMI is mounted in a 40TE case and provides an integrated local control panel and a PC interface for configuration and operation of the protection and control unit. To connect the detachable HMI to the protection and control unit, standard RJ45 cables (Ethernet cable, length max. 10 m) may be used. A 3 m standard RJ45 Ethernet cable is included with the shipment.

A connection to the detachable HMI may be established or separated at any time as the detachable HMI is recognized automatically and completely.

Basic unit For the detachable HMI option, the basic unit is available with case widths of 40TE or 84TE in either a flush-mounted or a surface-mounted case and is provided in several variants for an effortless adaptation to meet local operating conditions. The front plate includes 4 LED indicators for display purposes as well as the RJ45 interface to connect the detachable HMI.

Operation without the detachable HMI

The function of the protection and control unit is fully guaranteed even when the detachable HMI is not connected or the communication link between detachable HMI and the basic unit is interrupted. In such a case the basic unit is accessed via its PC interface. The function parameters for the local control panel and for LED indicators available only on the detachable HMI are automatically hidden in this event.

LED indicators on the detachable HMI

The freely configurable LED indicators H4 to H16 on the detachable HMI offer multi-color function assignment. Separate function assignments with a red and a green LED indicator are available. When both the red and the green LED indicators are simultaneously active the resulting color will be amber (yellow).


U-10 P139/EN AD/A88 // AFSV.12.09950 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-612

49Z6201A_

U-1 Basic unit with flush-mounted 40TE case and detachable HMI – front views

49Z6202A_

U-2 Detachable HMI – rear view


P139/EN AD/A88 // AFSV.12.09950 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-612 U-11

2.1.1 Address List

Device Identification Address Description Range of Values Units

002 131 DVICE: SW version DHMI 0.00 ... 655.35

002 132 DVICE: SW version DHMI DM 0.00 ... 655.35

221.099 LOC: Local HMI exists No / Yes


085 184 LED: Fct.assig. H 1 green MAIN: Healthy

085 001 LED: Fct.assig. H 2 yell. MAIN: Blocked/Faulty

085 004 LED: Fct.assig. H 3 yell. SFMON: Warning (LED)

085 007 LED: Fct.assig. H 4 red According to the selection table for LEDs

085 057 LED: Fct.assig. H 4 green According to the selection table for LEDs











085 025 LED: Fct.assig. H10 red According to the selection table for LEDs

085 075 LED: Fct.assig. H10 green According to the selection table for LEDs





085 031 LED: Fct.assig. H12 rot According to the selection table for LEDs











U-12 P139/EN AD/A88 // AFSV.12.09950 D /// P139-307-411/412/413-612


085 185 LED: Fct.assig. H17 red LOC: Edit mode

085 182 LED: Operating mode H 1 ES updating



085 008 LED: Operating mode H 4 According to the selected operating mode















Pu

blic

atio

n:

P1

39

/EN

AD

/A8

8 (A

FSV

.12

.09

95

0.D

)


Pub

licat

ion:

P13

9/E

N M

/A88

– V

OL.

1/2

Documents

MiCOM P139 - Schneider Electricms.schneider-electric.be/OP_MAIN/Micom/P139_EN_M_A88_Vol2.pdf · MiCOM P139 Feeder Management and Bay Control ... E 4.12 Selection Table K11 E-369